Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
PROJECT MANUAL - 12/22/2021
— a 0 cc a J_ U z 0 U >- I-- . U i C 0; — U- 0 F- 0 — I- N z 0 U - City of Waterloo, Iowa — Waterloo, Iowa Project Manual For: Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Date: December 22, 2021 Project No.: 21-25083 OWNER: FROM: Architecture City of Waterloo, Iowa ISG - Waterloo Office ' s Engineering Greg Ahlhem Environmental 715 Mulberry St. 314 East 4th Street Planning Waterloo, IA 50703 Waterloo, Iowa 50703 sc>i^ccom Contact: Nathan Compton Phone: 319.234.1515 Email: Nathan.Compton@ISGInc.corn SECTION 00 0105 CERTIFICATIONS PAGE CITY OF WATERLOO SULLIVAN BROTHERS PLAZA RENOVATION WATERLOO, IOWA ISG NO. 21-25083 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct ��"��\� supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed OFSSIO/�/q� hl�q Architect under the laws of the State of Iowa. �r�QQ .. ... "Pc, $ /7 -' 12-22-2021 it y I Date a W NATHANIELJ.': ' V Nathaniel J. Co on, AIA > 0 4 U COMPTON ' �-1 i 0 07016 License No.: 07016 Date Issued: 12-08-2014 a 411 * * cn My License Renewal Date is July 31, 2022 ihk /OW P N*4 toQ ����' Sections covered by this seal: ›- I-- , Division 00, 01, 03 - 14. o I :z' 0 F- I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission 0 described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed o U \\\.� oFEsslo 0,�� Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. o Q� Nq 12 22-2021 0 ` 'L: JASON E. m ' J,,k n E. Hoehn, P. . Date U . HOEHN _ 1 . 6140 : License No.: 16140 Date Issued: 03-27-2002 * * My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2021 ���'%,,,��+owl\ \\\``� Sections covered by this seal: Division 00, 01, 03 - 06. Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 0105 - Page 1 of 2 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct `,���,���������,,,,,,,� supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed pFESS1ON '',„ Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. ��pQ <2 w . JOHN P. G'z�= d 12-22-2021 • P. rickel, P.E. Date U_ • TRICKEL .• m "' 17586 = License No.: 17586 License Issued: 07-13-2005 - -/,,' IOWA \,`.``‘‘`�� My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2022 'ii„Ilitilti ‘ Sections covered by this seal: - Division 00, 01, and 21 - 23. o a. 09 3 0 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission G described below was prepared by me or under my direct c� w,,i i,,,,,,� supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed "` ‘•. r., ESS1ON'",,, Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. • z 4,.• '• ••.�Z' „� /�A a2 22 2021 MICHAELD. . 0 = Michael D. Nelson, P.E. m` Z ' NELSON • — - Date v `u : 20425 : z = ti— U•• .,� License No.: 20425 Date Issued: 04-21-20110 ... --b U- * •••••••'•n My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2022 z ' /OwP &Jill:111,10 ` Sections covered by this seal: Division 00, 01, 26 - 28. DATED THE 22ND DAY OF DECEMBER 2021 END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 0105 - Page 2 of 2 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS — 2.01 DIVISION 00 --PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS A. 00 0000 - Project Manual Cover B. 00 0105 - Certifications Page C. 00 0110 -Table of Contents D. 00 1113- Notice of Public Hearing _ E. 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders F. 00 3100 -Available Project Information 1. Attachment- Detailed Drawing CO-30 - Flagpole - See Sheet C3-101 for more detailed information. — 2. Attachment- Detailed Drawing CO-31 -Tables - See Sheet C3-101 for more detailed information. G. 00 3113 - Bidding and Construction Schedule H. 00 4100 - Bid Form d 1. Attachment-- Bidder Status Form n 2. Attachment-- MBE-WBE Certified Contractors List 3. Attachment-- MBE-WBE - CCO-1 Compliance Form Index a. 4. Attachment-- MBE-WBE - CCO-1A Contract Compliance Program Policy 5. Attachment-- MBE-WBE - CCO-2 Subcontractors Bid Request Form <J — 6. Attachment-- MBE-WBE - CCO-3 Letter Solicting for Subcontractors z 7. Attachment-- MBE-WBE - CCO-4 Pre-Bid Contact Form ca 8. Attachment-- MBE-WBE - CCO-4A Pre-Bid Contact Information Form Instructions t 9. Attachment-- MBE-WBE - CCO-5 Letter of Intent to Bid , 10. Attachment-- MBE-WBE - CCO-6 Certificate of Accomplishment o 11. Attachment-- Exemption Form - City of Waterloo 0 I. 00 7200 - General Conditionso — 1. Attachment--AIA Document A201, 2017 Edition J. 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions CI c� SPECIFICATIONS c 3.01 DIVISION 01 --GENERAL REQUIREMENTS o A. 01 2000- Price and Payment Procedures 2i — B. 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements z 1. Attachment-- Shop Drawing Submittal Form 2. Attachment-- Requirements for Electronically Submitted Shop Drawings — C. 01 3510 - Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Attachment-- Structural Testing and Special Inspection Program Summary Schedule D. 01 4000 -Quality Requirements — E. 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls F. 01 6000 - Product Requirements 1. Attachment-- Substitution Request Form — G. 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements H. 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals Section 00 0110 - Page 1 of 2 Project No. 21-25083 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3.02 DIVISION 02 --EXISTING CONDITIONS 3.03 DIVISION 03 --CONCRETE 3.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY 3.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS 3.06 DIVISION 06 --WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 3.07 DIVISION 07 --THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 3.08 DIVISION 08 --OPENINGS 3.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES 3.10 DIVISION 10 --SPECIALTIES 3.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT 3.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS 3.13 DIVISION 13 --SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 3.14 DIVISION 14 --CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 3.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION 3.16 DIVISION 22 --PLUMBING 3.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 3.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL a A. 26 0010- Basic Electrical Requirements B. 26 0505 - Selective Demolition for Electrical C. 26 0519- Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables D. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems E. 26 0529- Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems F. 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems G. 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems H. 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems I. 26 0583 - Wiring Connections J. 26 0923- Lighting Control Devices K. 26 0943 - Lighting Control System L. 26 2200 - Low-Voltage Transformers o M. 26 2416- Panelboards N. 26 2726 -Wiring Devices O. 26 2813 - Fuses P. 26 2816.13 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers Q. 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches R. 26 5600- Exterior Lighting 3.19 DIVISION 27 --COMMUNICATIONS A. 27 1000 - Structured Cabling 3.20 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY A. 28 4600- Fire Detection and Alarm 3.21 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 3.22 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 0110 - Page 2 of 2 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 00 1113 NOTICE OF PUBLIC LETTING NOTICE OF BID LETTING FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SULLIVAN BROTHERS PLAZA RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA, AND THE TAKING OF BIDS FOR SUCH CONSTRUCTION. Notice is hereby given that the City Council of Waterloo, Iowa, will receive bids at the office of — the City Clerk in said City until the day of 2022 at 1:00 p.m., for the renovation of the Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation for the City of Waterloo, Iowa in and for said City. All bids shall be submitted to the City Clerk's Office at 715 Mulberry Street. Bids will be publicly opened, livestreamed on YouTube and made available on the city website; and tabulated on said day and hour and will then be acted on by the City Council at their meeting on the day of 2022 at 5:30 p.m.for their consideration and action. _ The project consists of renovation of the existing Plaza area along West 4th street which will include the groundwork for a Memorial to the Five Sullivan Brothers. Work along Jefferson Street and Commercial Street are also included in the project. There will be landscaping, electrical, and structural work included in the project, and related work indicated in the drawings and — specifications. A prebid conference will be held on site on the day of 2022 at p.m., to review site conditions. Meet at Five Sullivan Brothers Convention Center, 200 West 4th Street, a, — Waterloo, Iowa, in the Lobby. a, A more detailed description of the kinds and approximate quantities of materials and types of _ construction for which bids will be received are set forth in the Bidding Documents prepared by z ISG, of Waterloo, Iowa, which, together with the proposed form of contract, have heretofore been 6 approved by the City Council, and are now on file for public examination at the office of the City 0 Clerk, and are by this reference made part hereof as though fully set out and incorporated herein. -; All sealed bids in connection therewith shall be submitted to the City Clerk on or before the time a herein set for letting. All proposals shall be made on official proposal forms furnished by the Architect/Engineer and must be enclosed in a separate sealed envelope and plainly identified as o to which project it regards and addressed to the City of Waterloo, Iowa. If a bid is to be mailed, the bid envelope shall be sealed in a regular mailing envelope. FAX and E-mail Bids will not be accepted. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities and to H Cr) _ hold and consider the bids for 45 days after the date of the bid opening. The contract will be o awarded to the lowest, responsive, responsible bidder. 0 o Each proposal shall be accompanied by a bid bond, certified check, cashier's check or certified — share draft in a separate sealed envelope, clearly marked "Bid Bond" or Bid Security", in an z amount equal to five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal. The certified or cashier's check shall be drawn on a bank in Iowa or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States of America or the certified share draft shall be drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the — laws of the United States and payable to the City. Said check or share draft may be cashed, or the bid bond forfeited as liquidated damages in the event the successful bidder fails or refuses to enter into a contract within ten (10) days of issuance of a Notice of Award and post bond — satisfactory to the City insuring the faithful fulfillment of the contract and maintenance of said improvements as required by law. The bid bond should be executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa and must not contain any conditions either in the body or as an endorsement thereon. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a corporate surety bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms — and conditions therein contained, the payment for materials used in the project and the maintenance of said improvements in good repair for not less than one (1) year from the time of acceptance of said improvements by the City. NPH-1 Payment of the cost of said project will be made from such cash funds of the City as may be legally used for said purpose at the discretion of the City. The Contractor will be paid ninety-five per cent (95%) of the Architect's/Engineer's estimate of the value of acceptable work completed at the end of the preceding month. Final payment will be made not less than thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the City, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa. No such final payment will be due until the Contractor certifies to the City that the materials, labor, and services involved in the final estimate have been paid for in accordance with the requirements stated in the specifications. The City of Waterloo is exempt from paying Sales and Use Tax and will supply Contractor with an"Iowa Sales Tax Exemption Certificate" and an authorization letter to allow the Contractor to buy equipment and material for the project without paying Sales and Use tax. The work on this project shall commence within ten (10) days after receipt by the contractor of a written notice to proceed and shall be substantially completed on or before the day of 2022, subject to any changes in the contract period as provided for in these specifications and granted by the City Council. The Work on this project shall be finally completed by, and ready for final payment, on or before the day of 2022 subject to any changes in the contract period as provided for in these specifications and granted by the City Council. By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa. In accordance with Iowa statutes, a resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country if that state or foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state or foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country. The preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. In the instance of a resident labor force preference, a nonresident bidder shall apply the same resident labor force preference to a public improvement _ in this state as would be required in the construction of a public improvement by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. Failure to submit a fully completed Bidder Status Form with the bid may result in the bid being deemed nonresponsive and rejected. Plans and specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by the Architect/Engineer. These plans and specifications, and the proceedings of the — City Council referring to and defining said improvements, are hereby made a part of this Notice and the proposed contract by reference, and the proposed contract shall be executed to comply therewith. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of contract are now on file in the office of the City Clerk, for examination by bidders. Copies may also be obtained from Rapids Reproductions, by calling 1-800-383-1223, upon deposit of two-hundred dollars ($200.00) which shall be refunded if plans and specifications are returned to Rapids Reproductions, Inc. no later than fourteen (14) days following award of project. If the plans and specifications are not returned within the allotted time and in a reusable condition, the deposit shall be forfeited. Please call ahead to make sure that bidding documents are ready to pick up when you arrive. Drawings, specifications, and other Bidding Documents may also be obtained online at www.questcdn.com. If you do not already have a free membership, you may sign up for one to NPH-2 gain access to the documents. The QuestCDN eBidDoc number is 7978016. There is no fee to access a pdf copy of the documents online. Documents are viewable at www.questcdn.com and www.ISGlnc.com free of charge. Any bidder or equipment supplier whose firm or affiliate is listed in the GSA publication "List of Parties Excluded from Federal Procurement and Non-procurement Programs" will be prohibited from the bidding process. Anyone submitting a bid who is listed in this publication will be determined to be a non-responsive bidder in accordance with 40 CFR Part 31. Published upon order of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA BY/s/ Quentin M. Hart Mayor ATTEST: BY/s/ Kelley Felchle — City Clerk 0 o: o. U z 0 u 0; C' 0t 2 z' 0 c,) H 40 z 0 0 U- H 0 z NPH-3 SECTION 00 2113 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUMMARY 1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES A. Advertisement 1. Bid Submission 2. Contract Time B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents 1. Definitions 2. Contract Documents Identification _ 3. Availability 4. Examination 5. Creating a level bidding environment 6. Inquiries/Addenda 7. Product/Assembly/System Substitutions C. Site Assessment 1. Site Examination 2. Prebid Conference D. Qualifications 1. Subcontractors/Suppliers/Others E. Bid Submission 1. Submission Procedure 2. Bid Ineligibility F. Bid Enclosures/Requirements 1. Security Deposit CD 2. Performance Assurance 3. Bid Form Requirements 0 4. Bid Form Signature 5. Additional Bid Information 2 6. Permits and Fees z G. Offer Acceptance/Rejection c� 1. Duration of Offer 2. Acceptance of Offer 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS a cc A. Document 00 7300- Supplementary Conditions: ADVERTISEMENT 2.01 BID SUBMISSION A. Refer to Section 00 1113 for bid submission information. B. Offers submitted after the time indicated in Section 00 1113 shall be returned to the bidder unopened. C. Offers will be opened immediately after the time for receipt of bids as indicated in Section 00 1113. 2.02 CONTRACT TIME A. Perform the Work within the time stated in Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions. BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.01 DEFINITIONS A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Advertisement for Bids Instructions to Bidders, Information Available to Bidders, Bid Form Bid securities identified. B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda. C. Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal. Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 2113 - Page 1 of 6 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation D. Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form. 3.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION A. The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 21-25083 with contents as identified in the Table of Contents of the drawings and specifications. 3.03 AVAILABILITY A. Contractors and suppliers that download and/or order plans from QuestCDN or _ Rapidsrepro.com/planroom will be added to the Plan Holders List. Downloading the construction documents from QuestCDN or Rapidsrepro.com/planroom will entitle you to all addenda and updates prior to the project bid date. 1. Contractors and suppliers who access the plans from a builder exchange or from another -- plan holder will not be added to the Plan Holders List. They will be responsible for periodically checking back with their original plan source for any addenda that may have been issued. 2. Contractors and suppliers who access the plans from a builders exchange or from another plan holder may receive an e-mailed copy of the current Plan Holders List, but only at a maximum of once a week. Plan holders lists may be viewed and obtained on the QuestCDN website or Rapidsrepro.com/planroom free of charge. _. 3. Plan holders who download plans from QuestCDN or Rapidsrepro.com/planroom will receive addenda notifications from the QuestCDN web site via email. They will be responsible for downloading addenda from the QuestCDN web site and they will not receive mailed or e-mailed copies of the addenda. B. Documents are viewable at both www.questcdn.com, Rapidsrepro.com/planroom and www.is- grp.com free of charge. C. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not grant a license for other purposes. 3.04 EXAMINATION A. The following builder exchanges have been notified of plan availability. It is at the sole discretion of each exchange to acquire the plans and make available to bidders. 1. Minnesota Exchanges a. Albert Lea Builders Exchange b. Austin Builders Exchange c. Duluth Builders Exchange d. Hibbing Builders Exchange e. iSqFt&AGC of MN Planroom Partnership f. Mankato Builders Exchange g. Minneapolis Builders Exchange h. Builders Exchange of Rochester i. St. Cloud Builders Exchange j. St. Paul Builders Exchange k. South Central Builders Exchange I. Southwest Builders Exchange m. Willmar Builders Exchange (Mid Minnesota) 2. Iowa Exchanges a. North Iowa Builders Exchange b. Master Builders of Iowa _. 3. Wisconsin Exchanges a. La Crosse Builders Exchange b. Milwaukee Builders Exchange —' c. Wausau Builders Exchange d. Fox Valley Plan Room e. Builders Exchange of Wisconsin f. Northwest Regional Builders Exchange Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 2113 - Page 2 of 6 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation g. AGC of Greater Milwaukee — 4. North Dakota a. Bismarck-Mandan Builders Exchange b. Fargo-Moorhead Builders Exchange c. Grand Forks Builders Exchange d. Minot Builders Exchange e. Williston Builders Exchange 5. South Dakota a. Aberdeen Builders Exchange b. Plains Builders Exchange (Sioux Falls) c. Sioux Falls Builders Exchange 6. Nebraska a. Omaha Builders Exchange b. Lincoln Builders 7. National a. Reed Construction Data b. McGraw Hill Construction Plan Room c. MEDA Minority Contractors Plan Room ocr- d. NAMC (National Association of Minority Contractors) e. Bidclerk a va B. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the documents be incomplete. C. Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents. 3.05 CREATING A LEVEL BIDDING ENVIRONMENT A. Drawings and specifications are complementary and do not create a hierarchy. o B. By submitting a bid, bidders agree that they have reviewed, in detail, all documents issued for z bidding purposes. c�a C. The following will not entitle a contractor to a change order increasing the overall project cost after the project has been awarded: 1. Selectively choosing less significant content from the drawings or specifications where conflicting information is evident. 2. Disregarding content that only appears in one part of the Bidding Documents. o D. A written request for clarification during the bidding process will result in an addendum being issued to resolve such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Bidding Documents therefore Z creating a level bidding environment for all bidders. 3.06 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA A. Direct questions to the Architect's Representative: Nathan Compton, telephone: 319.234.1515, e-mail: Nathan.Compton@ISGlnc.com. B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract -' Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. C. Verbal answers are not binding on any party. D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set for receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to known recipients and [ 1. 3.07 PRODUCT/ASSEMBLY/SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements for additional requirements. Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 2113 - Page 3 of 6 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SITE ASSESSMENT 4.01 SITE EXAMINATION A. Examine the project site before submitting a bid. _ 4.02 PREBID CONFERENCE A. Refer to Section 00 1113 for prebid conference information. B. All general contract and subcontract bidders and suppliers are invited. C. Representatives of Architect will be in attendance. D. Information relevant to the Bid Documents will be recorded in an Addendum, issued to Bid Document recipients. Imo QUALIFICATIONS 5.01 SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS/OTHERS A. Owner reserves the right to reject a proposed subcontractor for reasonable cause. B. Refer to General Conditions. BID SUBMISSION 6.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed. B. Submit one copy of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided in a closed opaque envelope, signed and sealed, with the required security in a separate envelope, signed and sealed, both envelopes in a larger closed opaque envelope, clearly identified each envelope and its contents . with bidder's name, project name, and Owner's name on the outside. C. Improperly completed information, irregularities in bid bond, may be cause not to open the Bid Form envelope and declare the bid invalid or informal. 5� D. An abstract summary of submitted bids will be made available to all bidders following bid opening. F:5 6.02 BID INELIGIBILITY =' A. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain , arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the Owner, be declared unacceptable. 7D B. Bid Forms, Appendices, and enclosures that are improperly prepared may, at the discretion of Owner, be declared unacceptable. C. Failure to provide security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements may, at the discretion of Owner, be waived. BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS 0 7.01 SECURITY DEPOSIT A. Bids shall be accompanied by a security deposit as follows: 1. Bid Bond of a sum no less than 5 percent of the Bid Amount on AIA A310 Bid Bond Form. B. Endorse the Bid Bond in the name of the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the principal — (Contractor) and surety. C. The security deposit will be returned after delivery to the Owner of the required Performance and Payment Bond(s) by the accepted bidder. D. Include the cost of bid security in the Bid Amount. E. After a bid has been accepted, all securities will be returned to the respective bidders . F. If no contract is awarded, all security deposits will be returned. — 7.02 BIDDERS STATUS FORM A. Bids shall be accompanied by the bidders status form included in this manual. Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 2113 - Page 4 of 6 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 7.03 PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE A. Accepted Bidder: Provide a Performance and Payment bond as described in Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions. B. Include the cost of Performance and Payment Bonds in the Bid Amountand identify the cost on the Bid Form. 7.04 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS A. Complete all requested information in the Bid Form. 7.05 BID FORM SIGNATURE A. The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows: 1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the words"Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Affix seal. 2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the word "Partner" under each signature. Affix seal to each signature. 3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures. Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with the Bid Form in the bid envelope. 4. Joint Venture: Each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid Form under their respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar to the requirements of a Partnership. a 7.06 ADDITIONAL BID INFORMATION Li A. Submit the following Supplements 24 hours after bid submission if you are the apparent low z bidder or as requested to do so by the Architect or the Owner: 1. List of Subcontractors: Include the names of all Subcontractors and the portions of the o Work they will perform. -- 2. Proposed Schedule of Values: Identify the Bid Amount allotted to each portion of the Work. 2 7.07 PERMITS AND FEES A. The General Contractor is responsible for contacting the city and state in which the project is to be constructed to obtain a building permit, other fees and permits, and coordinating with subcontractors who are to include fees and permits in their bid amount. Include the cost of building permit, and other fees and permits in the Base Bid amount. Other fees and permits may include but are not limited to: S 1. Plan Review. CD 2. City Water and Sewer Access. 3. Parkland Dedications. o 4. Inspection. 5. Connection. _ 6. All other similar types of permits and fees. 7.08 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATES A. Bids will be evaluated based on the lowest proposed base bid or on the lowest proposed bid fee calculated by the combined sums of the base bid and selection of the alternates chosen by the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to choose either the lowest base bid alone, or the lowest base bid in combination with the alternates in the order listed. _ OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION 8.01 DURATION OF OFFER A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for the number of days after the _ bid closing date as indicated in Section 00 1113. 8.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER A. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers. Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 2113 - Page 5 of 6 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation B. After acceptance by Owner, Architect on behalf of Owner, will issue to the successful bidder, a written Notice of Award. END OF SECTION 0 cr as ae z 0 g r 0 LL 0 0 H cn z 0 0 0 0 z Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 2113 - Page 6 of 6 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 00 3100 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PRODUCT DRAWING A. Flagpole 1. Attachment- Detailed Drawing CO-30 Flagpole- See Sheet C3-101 for more detailed information. B. Tables 1. Attachment- Detailed Drawing CO-31 - See Sheet C3-101 for more detailed information. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION cc U) v — z 0 >. 0 CC U. V 0 CC z 0 cr 0 U- 0 z Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 3100 - Page 1 of 1 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Single sheave truck, cast aluminum revolving, non-fouling, internal Model ECSA35 IH I Il;;;, F halyard truck = 1/8" x 7x19 Mil-C-5424 _�yy Stainless steel aircraft cable 11►' A - o Standard flag arrangement: 6' x 10' o oI i r 4 O I Neoprene coated 2" diameter `c000 ie. steel counterweight IIMI /���� �I/ lil l a 0 cvA Nylon beaded retainer ring o x Revolving non-fouling internal halyard co truck, cast aluminum body, 26 .Bo steel ball bearings, and 2-1/2" diameter plated V steel sheave. —4 --- c m `° Gearless, self locking direct drive winch with six tumbler 0 • cylinder lock o � 3`. to41.11)1111111P1131411117111111141 •(9 ' O 00 - U) ��� 0 �Q" L Aluminum flash collar Q o O� V • ' n. • 3000 PSI concrete 1 Q, Winch Detail dal _ 1 c2 L Hardwood wedges 0111111r. # t rn (supplied by others) All shafts with overall '�� Dry sand tightly tamped o length of more than after aligning pole (• 9 38'-6" are shipped in ; I Foundation sleeve-16 ga c 'Co two sections. hot dip galvanized steel o CO Each section matched marked for field assembly. I Steel centering wedges A o v Exposed portion of jam I '� li sleeve must be well II i 6 lubricated prior to 1/4" Steel base plate assembly. : 1I -.4--110-8° 12" 1-1/2" maximum shop -- --`' 1/4" Steel support plate gap allowed for field welded to grounding spike -iiii -16 _ill- fitting (ram for tight joint) -41 30" ►- 'h Project: Ground set tapered aluminum flagpole: ALLOY: 6063T6 EDER FLAG Date: - Location: Exposed height: 35'-0" Overall height: 38'-6" MANUFACTURING COMPANY Revision: Architect: Ship in 2 sections Butt diameter: 5" 1000 W.Rawson Avenue Contractor Top diameter: 3" Wall thickness: .188" Oak Creek,WI 53154 Customer: Finish: 100 grit polish Job: 7 co (.0 (.50,2-ci, ,i_ iLJ-, O CVu)W Lij Z� CV UC)CC D W O OO=� CO vUP� 0 E 7 oz�_i 1 o \.... ‘111\ 6 0 z co- ;1 J OOu-w- .� vi O_z QF-� a) pr'Q� o LL • 0z�a o �( w,OQ WC70� CD HA Z• w0Lo Qa 1 c 0z0.....>/ zOw Q0-m zO100 ' vccI- ....I / zaOz O z- 0 pJ w � ~ Q_JW N la 0 O(QJ pJI1- In CO OUN �N ►u"NQ' N `� OO "______ 0 Z m Ov) Ell -6C' C) ZZ -J<.0 Q Q OQw O CC & o 1O CD Z �M El - ID ue - / / I '••••.- -----2 \ / To CO o- U O C o N O 0 . 7Ao Qs 0 co� T ) ~ w cp. o 0 u, 1_ (n0) U) - VJ m NM I. v^ Q 0 0 JM Li Ln 5 2 0' - J- o Z SECTION 00 3113 BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CITY OF WATERLOO SULLIVAN BROTHERS PLAZA RENOVATION WATERLOO, IOWA ISG NO. 21-25083 1, 2021 Send out Notice of Public Letting for Bids. ( 1, 2022 Prebid meeting, walk-through. f 1 p.m. ( 1, 2022 Receive Bids before f 1 p.m. ( 1, 2022 Estimated date to issue Notice of Award. a. ( 1, 2022 Estimated date to execute contract and issue Notice to Proceed. 0 z 1, 2022 Estimated commence construction date. 1, 2022 Substantial completion, perform final walk through and a inspection with Owner and Architect. Owner can occupy. o z 0 f 1, 2022 Final Completion. I END OF SECTION I 0 c� z Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 3113 - Page 1 of 1 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 00 4100 BID FORM CITY OF WATERLOO SULLIVAN BROTHERS PLAZA RENOVATION WATERLOO, IOWA ISG NO. 21-25083 DATE Company Submitted By: Ladies and Gentlemen: The undersigned being familiar with the conditions; having made a field inspection and investigation I/we deem necessary; having studied the Plans and Specifications for the work, and being familiar with all factors and other conditions affecting the work and cost thereof, hereby propose to furnish all labor, tools, materials, skills, equipment, building permit, other fees and permits, and all else necessary to completely construct the project in accordance with the Plans and Specifications as prepared by ISG, 314 East 4th Street, Waterloo, Iowa 50703 for the prices as entered on the following pages of this proposal. c I/We hereby certify that I am/we are the only person, persons, firm or corporation interested in 0_ this proposal as principals and that it is made without collusion with any person, firm or corporation. It is understood that the following Bid/Bids shall include all necessary materials, labor, supervision, machinery, equipment, tools, bracing, false work and other means of construction, a including all necessary tests incidental to such installation. I/We guarantee all of the work performed under this contract to be done in accordance with the L plans and specifications, and in a good and workmanlike manner, and to redo or repair any o work which may be rejected due to defective materials or workmanship, prior to the final ` acceptance of the project, and for a period of two years after such final acceptance, by the Project Architect and the Owner. 1.7 v I/We propose to begin work and to prosecute the work so as to complete the same as indicated. BASE BID: The work to be included in this project is a renovation of the existing Plaza area along West 4th Street which will include the ground work for a Memorial to the Five Sullivan Brothers. Work along Jefferson Street and Commerical Street are also included in the project. There will be landscaping, electrical, and structural work included int he project, and related b Work indicated in the drawings and specifications for the Sum of: Z Dollars — ( ) CONTRACT TIME: If this Bid is accepted, I/we will: Commence work as soon as possible after Receipt of Notice to Proceed and shall complete the Work by the time indicated per Section 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions. BID SECURITY- CONTRACTS: A properly executed bid bond of a sum no less than five percent (5%)of the base bid amount or a certified check in the amount of$ equal to no less than five percent (5%) of the base bid amount accompanies this proposal. It is understood that bids may not be withdrawn for a period of 45 days after the date and time set for the opening of bids. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to retain the bid security of the bidders for a period not to exceed 45 days after the date set for the opening of bids. Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 4100 - Page 1 of 2 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Acknowledgement or Receipt of Addendum (if issued) Received Addendum No. 1, dated _ Received Addendum No. 2, dated Received Addendum No. 3, dated (A CORPORATION) (A LIMITED PARTNERSHIP) (A GENERAL PARTNERSHIP) (A SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP) (CIRCLE ONE OR INDICATE COMPANY OWNERSHIP STRUCTURE TYPE ABOVE) COMPANY NAME: ADDRESS: a 0 rr cn SUBMITTED BY: (PRINT OR TYPE NAME) ca 7- TITLE: o 1` I LI_or PHONE NUMBER: _1_( ) - z " C3, FAX NUMBER: _1_( ;n E-MAIL ADDRESS: 2 U- SIGNATURE: ! END OF SECTION 1 Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 4100 - Page 2 of 2 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Bidder Status Form To be completed by all bidders Part A Please answer"Yes" or"No"for each of the following: ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is authorized to transact business in Iowa. (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the worksheet on the next page). ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has an office to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mail. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a subsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder in Iowa. If you answered "Yes"for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form. If you answered "No" to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form. To be completed by resident bidders Part B My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses: cr Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: / / to / / Address: c.) City, State, Zip: a- • Dates: / / to / / Address: o Il You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. City, State, Zip: z To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C 1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State: ca 2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to resident bidders, resident labor force preferences or any other type of preference to bidders or laborers? Yes ❑ No 0 3. If you answered "Yes"to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation. You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. To be completed by all bidders Part D I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowledge and I know that my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may be a reason to reject my bid. Firm Name: Signature: Date: You must submit the completed form to the governmental body requesting bids per 875 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 156. This form has been approved by the Iowa Labor Commissioner. 309-6001 (09-15) Worksheet: Authorization to Transact Business This worksheet may be used to help complete Part A of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a sole proprietorship and I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a general partnership or joint venture. More than 50 percent of the general partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State and has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report, and has not filed articles of dissolution. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa, the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, has filed its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this state and the statement has not been canceled. o c.a — Yes No Mybusiness is a limited❑ ❑ liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of o cancellation has not been filed. z ` 0 ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership which has filed a certificate of limited partnership in this state, and has not filed a statement of termination. E I) ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability ct limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership. - ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa and has not filed a statement of termination. - ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa and the certificate has not been revoked or canceled. 309-6001 (09-15) CERTIFIED MBE / WBE CONTRACTORS CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA /Airs' ilk Nis 0,1 v CONTRACT COMPLIANCE OFFICE Community Development Board o Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, Iowa 50703 p CC City WEB Site: www.ci.waterloo.ia.us 0 Contract Compliance WEB Site for listing updates: http://www.wplwloo.lib.ia.us/contractcompliance/ Contact: Rudy Jones, Community Development Director Email: rudy.ionesAwaterloo-ia.org Phone: (319) 291-4429 Fax: (319) 291-4431 MBE/WBE Certified Contractors List Page 1 of 2 DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT 3358 Bristol Road Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone: (319) 961-1659 Contact: Sammy Daniels Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK, POURED WALLS—ALL TYPES, FOOTINGS, LIGHT DEMOLITION D.C. CORPORATION 426 Beech Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)493-2542 FAX: (319) 236-0515 Contact: Terry Phillips Q ftw Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PAVING, DRIVEWAYS, TRUCKING(ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION QUICK CONSTRUCTION 217 Bates Street F; I Waterloo, IA 50703 o Phone: (319) 215-4166 0 fro Contact: Leroy Harrington Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION z 0 c) cc o� I MBE/WBE Certified Contractors List Page 2 o f 2 •• CONTRACT COMPLIANCE FORM INDEX (as of 07-08-2002) Form CCO-1, Contract Compliance Policy This is the Current Contract Compliance Program for the City of Waterloo and must be adhered to for any City of Waterloo contracts over$50,000, funded solely with City funds. Form CCO-2, Subcontractors Bid Request Form This form acknowledges that the Prime Contractor has contacted potential MBE/WBE subcontractors. This form is initiated and signed by the Prime Contractor then signed by the MBE/WBE subcontractor and returned to the Prime contractor by the MBE/WBE contractor. Form CCO-3, -Letter to be used when soliciting for Subcontractor Quotes This is a sample letter from the Prime Contractor to Subcontractors soliciting bids for various contract items. Q a Form CCO-4, Pre-Bid Contact Information Form1.1 This form and the accompanying Form CCO-4A, must be completed and submitted with the Prime Contractor's Bid. o 0 9- Certification of Prime Contractor Regarding MBE/WBE Unavailability v If any MBE/WBE's submitting bids are not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany Form CCO-4. 0 Form CCO-4A, Pre-Bid Contact Information Instructions Detailed instructions on how Form CCO-4 should be completed and the responsibilities of the Prime Contractor and the Subcontractor. 0 Form CCO- 5, Letter of Intent to Bid from MBE/WBE Contractor ° 7Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient scope letters are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. This form is completed and signed by the MBE/WBE. Form CCO-6, Final MBE/WBE Participation Amounts Upon Completion and Finalization of the project, the Prime Contractor must submit this form with their final documents. It shall be filled out and signed by the Prime Contractor on the project. If project goals are not met, a detailed report must accompany this form prior to release of retainage. J:\JACK-F\DBE File\Contract Compliance Program\Form INDEX.doc I City of Waterloo, Iowa /10k erloo swa O s MBE/WBE CONTRACT Q COMPLIANCE PROGRAM FE FE FOR 0 THE CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA (As amended 07-08-2002) _ 1 MBE/WBE CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA - 2002 PURPOSE The purpose of the Contract Compliance Program (hereinafter called Program) is to act as an impetus for increasing the participation of minority and women disadvantaged business enterprise (MBE/WBE) in City awarded construction contracts. The Program does not propose to eliminate any bonafide contractor or subcontractor from bidding on City contracts, but it will hopefully serve as a needed stimulus to help local MBE/WBE's growtrAm and eventually become mainstream contractors and subcontractors. This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set-aside or quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the contractor to use MBE/WBE subcontractors. This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their "good-faith efforts" in using MBE/WBE subcontractors on City contracts estimated at less than $50,000. The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE firms. °` The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo awarded U construction contracts. 0 DEFINITIONS Goals: 17, A flexible numerically expressed objective which contractors are required to make "good-faith efforts." The key to the requirement is to make efforts. 2 Quota: A flat numerical requirement that the contractor is required to meet in order to obtain the benefit or be in compliance. ` Set-Aside: An arrangement in which a particular contract is reserved for competition solely among minority — business enterprise. Contractor: L ! As used in this document means contractor, subcontractor, supplier, vendor, and professional service provider. NEM Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more minorities and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List. 2 Women Business Enterprise (WBE): Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more women and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List. Minority: Any person or persons who are considered as socially and economically disadvantaged because of their identity as a group member without regard to their individual qualities. The groups include: Black American, Hispanic American, Native Americans, Eskimos, Aleuts, and Asian-Pacific Americans. 13 C.F.R. 124-1.1(c)(3)(ii)(1983). Lowest Responsible Bidder: Bidder who has offered the lowest bid and who has exhibited skill relative to the type of work bid on, judgment, financial responsibility, and evidence of working with the Affirmative Action Employment Program and the Contract Compliance Program. a Broker: cn One buying or selling for others on commission or other fee basis without maintaining a warehouse or other similar inventory storage facility. Mayor's Advisory Committee: Mayor's Advisory Committee for Minority, Female, and Disadvantaged Business Enterprise. o LL z O Good Faith Efforts: The successful bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest responsible bid. The obligation of the bidder is to make good faith efforts. The bidder can demonstrate that it has done so by the following: 0 0 1. The Prime Contractor met the project goal -No Action necessary 2. If the Prime Contractor failed to meet the goal, they must submit documentation of good faith efforts. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM/SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections or goals regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least 10% for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000 or more and projects under $50,000 where applicable at the Contract Compliance Officer's discretion. There is at least 2% WBE goal on City funded projects. Any project which is funded solely or in part with Federal funds shall follow the respective agencies 3 contract compliance program and goals. Any project which is funded solely or in part with State — funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Program is for City awarded construction contracts only. The prime contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE Nam goals. The MBE/WBE subcontracts must provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid. Administrative Reconsideration As part of this reconsideration, the bidder will have the opportunity to provide written " M documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative Reconsideration Committee to discuss the tom issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the basis for finding that the bidder did or did not d L meet the goal or make adequate good faith efforts to do so. Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: L* Making portions of the work available for MBE/WBE subcontracting * Evidence of negotiating with MBE/WBE firms * MBE/WBE quotes obtained and non-MBE/WBE quotes used * Reasons agreements were not reached * Follow-up after initial solicitations * Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies and materials (at competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc. 0 1 * Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation)based on overall program goals. 2 RESPONSIBILITIES — I. City of Waterloo A. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations. B. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a current — directory of certified firms. Certification of MBE/WBE/DBE contractors is through the Iowa Depai tiuent of Transportation and its Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo. C. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE firms. 4 D. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate MBE/WBE firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening date. E. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE Letter(s) of Intent to Bid and immediately forward the complete list of MBE/WBE bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime contractors. II. Prime Contractors In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this program, the prime contractor must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program. Good-faith efforts include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO-3) to appropriate MBE/WBE (those certified in directory prepared by City Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven (7) working days prior to bid date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo MBE/WBE Certification List). If less than three (3) are offering the services to be subcontracted, then Q a contact is required for any that are listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a MBE/WBE contact not on the City's MBE/WBE list, attach a copy of the MBE/WBE/DBE Certifications from another government agency. 0 B. If a prime contract bidder is unable to identify MBE/WBE firms to perform portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be contacted for assistance immediately. o C. Prime contract bidders may solicit MBE/WBE proposals by telephone or personal interviews, but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO- 2 . cc 0) z D. If any MBE/WBE business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany the "MBE/WBE Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form o CCO-4 and CCO-4A) on why the MBE/WBE was not selected. These reasons could include: a. Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids may be required for verification. b. MBE/WBE did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive. c. Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the MBE/WBE business for a subcontract. d. Prime contractor self performs work. e. Any other reason relied on by prime. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation)based on overall program goals. III. MBE/WBE Firms A. MBE/WBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses. 1 5 B. MBE/WBE firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others. C. Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid(Form CCO-5)to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven(7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven(7) working days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE in which the MBE/WBE promises not to provide subcontracting quotations to other bidders/proposers are prohibited. NONCOMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS I A. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent with the ccCL requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas of employment and subcontracting. B. A bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a failure to 7.5 use certified MBE/WBE firms may be grounds for finding its bid not responsible. 5_ C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing. 0, crI NOTICE TO PROCEED Notice to proceed on any project with goals will not be issued until City Contract Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible bidder has used good-faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive. G CONCLUSION This program repeals or revises all sections of previous Waterloo Contract Compliance Programs. 2 0 IMEm low Maw J:\JACK-F\DBE File\Contract Compliance Program\FINAL PROGRAM 2002 07_08_02.doc 6 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD Contract No.: Letting Date: I, (subcontractor's name), hereby attest that I have been solicited for a bid on (project name) in the area of (description of work and bid item no.). (Prime contractor) has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must be submitted to the company office by (date) and (time). 0_ 0 Subcontractor's Company Name Date Subcontractor's Signature o lL' z' 0 C) rr Date Prime Bidder's Signature — 0 ca o: 0 LL — 0 z Form CCO-2 (12/31/2001) LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Subcontractor Company Name Address RE: Contract No. : • Dear (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the following work in connection with the above referenced project.. (Insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work) 0 (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is an Equal Opportunity Employer, and all qualified bidders will not be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, 0 or origin. z" If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by and (Date) (Time) Sincerely, (Prime Contractor's Representative) Form CCO- 3 (11/28/2001) E \ \ la ? ) 0 E m ,o E o 0 0 / % k \ k § / \ / 7 2 3 m c » u » % c 2 t= g = co o . \ k \ \ 2 } O a) 0. o 2 / b s o § 2 - - \ ID \ J o o .. § 2 = 2 e R E 5 - 2 » 7 £ - o @ / = 7 �\ \a 7 o : a 0 0 0 � \ � _ _1 » _ / » » 2 - , / / a % ao \/ 0 = kEO o % / \ 6 ® Ems / / E O _ di CO f \ > o LL � a) 2 \ CL '— �/ k% ƒ \ $ \ \ U cc O § \ \ § § \ f 0 2 Z 0 \ 22 7 / $ / 2 = / Oiii \ \ w / \ \ / \ £ ƒ co co W Li \ LLI 1- c o C 2 � E I a oQ gmm E ƒ O § W � \ � / \ \ 2q 5 ° 2 � 2 \ _ � / [ a) a) = E Ce -0 _ 2 CI W a a u - 2t. 7 F f f § / O ± ■ a \� - 1 ' / \ + / \ \\ 7 $ � U) WW 0 QI LU _ > = 2 .g « c § ZU) 2 � = o = m 03 1- 2f / \ \ƒ / ƒ 5 - W $ \ w 2 / / % / a 000 // � _ J 2 / to 0 \$ \ f / o .eL f ° % H » = R m g a & / ■ % p / \ � E \ e / k q / O 0 ® t = oc w o CO \ / \ \ k { \ \ f % - 2 / k /\ CO a $ m k _ - 0- e o o « 2 E ° ± CD O W m a \ oCI Q § � 0) / —I 2 .. 4- q / @ § / \ \ u \ c § ® 0 = CO < 0 o .- L 0 � co " >' \ / Q / J . � /f2 ƒ « _ � 22 ° .ea � R � S Q_ @ / E >/ ) a 3 0 � Kb \ Gf \ 4 9 = o ® � O 2coa) \ Em \ E- / 2 ° E g % § CO Z qR / = QQ = - 42 7 % o \ w \ � / < 5k 7f / � / \ k k - @ � 7 / ¥ ce \ ƒ ƒ S § # '- % U "a' � 2 f:74-rig \ \ / ( QC � � kal a) c / 0 0 c= >\ 2 ■ 2 - $ 5 ® % = 7 » m u E » ' o $\ o / / R 2 %f 3 $ m q b 2 Z = E o co 0 m w L ± m EE 2@ V o ) y fn U) a) co - >-, o > v) U 0 - O Z_ - a •E ca >' O a) N 0 W' CO - 0 0 a to •( y as N O W C O — -O U aa) W L.L. co N a) U CL o O • a- W 0) 0 O Z E U _ c C U) CO L W 0 O W U v E i cB.c O Q o m O _co C 0 O w p E Q - a �m w rn V O CO I- w • (I a) 0 Y O W o c ' <2 L CO _ 0 c 0 a m m 0 W o vv2C u, 0 0 22 3 _a C c>o O U ca Z 0 a) (73 C L W >. a) N F- co 0E C Q N . C cn W U L a) 0 C �6 O O O 0 > — C co Z � � m 0 � C E y Qo _o 0 > c c)- 2 a 0 C in co 0 Z `� o) ca cn cn o 0 0 O a) W cn a) co ca 0 °) c a) a) L I— •� gYL o U C � o oa J E a) o a) a) E E � a a w .N 3 � E � c v) m o 0 o a) N C :° -0 m o1E c �' mOCa) O � co CO Lu = w - v a.) v � aoo WH > coo0 � c 2' in °, -0 cc nso caa) C a) EOoa) ° c) Z Li 0 0 cr _0 y � Y W s �° �' Q � � a g 2 .�' 0 o N E 4. .°i o Ww ca tu °' � L �' io � � C c > 3 a m W 043 CO a � '. 5w g .�. W O _C 2 C a) V C m W _fn N C O C? vi— a z ZLL a) EoU) Opi EWia0) C H m � c0Lom -- CO E QCa) O0 0 WZ Ncacvo woo0 � >m _Cca > Z 2W 3ia - o)c .> �- c.) Q C Z UO > .N N W O2 ca 'LIE _C +�.� Q U N .��-- a) o O O .cis -0 w •- u) L 0 0 ) cn a - N H 0 0 o _c 1 E > 13m -o E o v) a) c mm a) 0) ca 3 L a W Q a3 Q a) C > E W E Y - > E a) w � C Z 2 c C N a � m •L ca ' o m E z o o Coo •. 0 0 _0 C E � fn o a -0 1Y 4-' a a) o a o O C O O y 0 a) ai M O o a) o o o c c °' .E m o 6 c _c-0 a)N > o o o -o 0 mtL LED ZCa) Eiocc W -a) `� 37Co CQcQo - 0 W Z � a a0i co m `� � cn o CO 0 0 o C Q C a) 0 U a) U) CO I— a) `) U ca ai o = C O fl a a o L o 0 0 0 cam 6o C V V w 0 c Q a) -C 92 0 LLI p a) a? t 0 op cn W Q c Z EU m LLI C -- N >, o o L c °) N f3 CO Z I- w m a y ca c�a C -� o - 0 0 0 m N C O a) O c� 0 C a) > N LL E C a) 0 Y C 0 0 Z T. O ' V o ate) ccu O C O > C N 03 0 as U c7 C 2O ' ID _cQ porn Cc•° 0- -c w n� cZ - � - a) 0 3 Q � c) 0 ° a `coo 0°Lb 0 C 0 a o `0 aoLi co 2 m o � 0 c„ 0 0 -E 0 ago 0 CO ° coC o s > a m cL° � al a Y ° o co N o a) E ° a) o 2 c coca cn E w a > W °) N wrILi) •� 0 •" a) a) 0 E >, ca � O E w a) cn -,a E vo) E -0g - °' C cp„ co oa mW 0 - E � 0 L 7 a O c a)4- ,L 0 CZ U cn L a 0 = N '� C C O W fn L O C N "6 -p U > �' O .. 7 0 C = N •-- U a) o m cn co N — 3 L a) 3 N o oin o � Uia � °- E — v _o O a� L m py� � V O C L. E N ED ° N ° W C :6 0 N '- N fa- 0 � - -� O - C 0 0 0 O L - N o 0 O W o o _co y C co coo 0 O cct U) Z a 0 N C la E (C6 a 0a N _ C = W cn a`oi o c L_ io 0 -0 0 3 � O ao 0 L CO N C - .,_. o 0 - cE U) 0 -C ) N Ca w O O N C,10) C U O 0 O C0 O ) 0 Q O 0 00 Lim o Ca oa) N = mU g � � 0 O Ed,:0C o - € "oo zc TA a°)) wtn3 2 > 0 '� cao a) co C0 Cti N• E_ UCwaa)cn o �y, co L 3 coW C L = LO Q co E cn C -- C _ o 0 C 0 w W m o o a) a d ' -0 C ,� j 0 0 .0- 0 D •„.- 0 ,� • � y � � cis-0.- a) m � � � E 0 E m ca Q o E a) V O _c m a C C) m a) U W 0 0 0 a O w 0 a) O O L i C m Q a Y C p0 w C cot - o O C m 0 C C w w 0 m 0 -C C U O o 00 Q C - ao cocaO Cc : o Q _ co Z aa < a o WUo0)w `r U U 112 Va W a) ••- N o m 0 0 p m c0 0 d to -6 U -0 a) E To - m `?6 2 u) c)m> 0 L y o 4- maco �)c2 C � O2 CLL 0 a) o CO , cw 0 E E N E -o < aL) 0 U � H � o C6 cog E 'i L co ca O C a) •- O co Z C 3 W a 15 = o as c\i o o U cri v a) 6w H o Cl) Li a s LETTER OF INTENT TO BID (MBE/WBE LETTER) According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program - 20G2, all MBE/WBE Contractors interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals, MUST submit a LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to the City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven (7) days prior to bid opening. The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBE/WBE Contractor is interested in bidding. Letter should include the following: Name of Project: Your Company Name: Address: Phone: Date: UJ ,.f List of Specific items to be bid: 0 Item No. Description: tr Item No. Description: °' 0 Item No. Description: Item No. Description: c cr Item No. Description: o (Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature) Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board 620 Mulberry St. Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 Form CCO-5 (06-20-2002) CITY OF WATERLOO CERTIFICATION OF MBE/WBE ACCOMPLISHMENT (To be completed by the Prime Contractor and submitted with the final documents) Contract: Prime Contractor: Letting Date: Completion Date: MBE/WBE Commitment Listed on Pre-Bid Form: $ % a a. MBE/WBE Company Dollars Committed Dollar Amount Paid % of Goal $ $ ' $ $ % o `7 CC $ $ TOTAL LL — I o (Name) the -� (Corporate Officer) of certify that the MBE/WBE (Prime Contractor) accomplishment to be true and accurate. (Date) (Signature) = Form CCO -6 (11-28-2001) City of Waterloo Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Contractor information Required Contractor Name Contact Name Phone Address Contractor Type: Prime Subcontractor Federal Employer Identification Number Project Name Project Description 7- Description of Work: o Brickwork Landscaping o Carpentry Painting Concrete Paving <n Drywall-Plaster-Insulation Plumbing Electrical Roofing-Siding-Sheet Metal Excavation/Grading Windows Flooring Wrecking-Demolition Heavy Construction Other(Please specify) Heating-Ventilating-Air Conditioning Contractor Construction Sales Tax Exemption Form Contractor Info Updated 4/14/04 SECTION 00 7200 GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.01 THE GENERAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS CONTRACT ARE AS FOLLOWS: A. AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2017 Edition, is the General Conditions between the Owner and Contractor. B. The General Conditions applicable to this contract is attached following this page. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions. 1.03 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A. Refer to document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions for amendments to thee general conditions. END OF SECTION 0 CC 0 z 0 0 >- _ rj cc' of Uf h� 0 0 cc H U) z 0 cc 0 r 0 z Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 7200 - Page 1 of 1 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation ! AIA Document A201 - 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its THE OWNER: completion.The author may also have revised the text of the original (Name, legal status and address) AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.A THE ARCHITECT: vertical line in the left margin of this (Name, legal status and address) document indicates where the author 0 has added necessary information aa.. and where the author has added to or < deleted from the original AIA text. c. TABLE OF ARTICLES This document has important legal 2 consequences.Consultation with an O attorney is encouraged with respect 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS to its completion or modification. i 2 OWNER For guidance in modifying this 0 document to include supplementary 3 CONTRACTOR conditions,see AIA Document A503TM,Guide for Supplementary 4 ARCHITECT Conditions. D fn 5 SUBCONTRACTORS cc 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS _ r 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 0 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Init. AIA Document A201°—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201."and"AIA Contract Documents"are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents°Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) INDEX Architect's Authority to Reject Work (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.) 3.5,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Decisions 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.2.14,6.3, Acceptance of Work 7.3.4,7.3.9,8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2, 9.4.1,9.5,9.8.4,9.9.1, 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 13.4.2, 15.2 _ Access to Work Architect's Inspections 3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 Accident Prevention Architect's Instructions 10 3.2.4,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7, 13.4.2 L Acts and Omissions Architect's Interpretations 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3, 8.3.1,9.5.1, 10.2.5, 4.2.11,4.2.12 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Architect's Project Representative Addenda 4.2.10 1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Costs,Claims for 1.1.2, 1.5,2.3.3,3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2, 3.7.4,3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 3.5,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.9.3, 3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16, i� Additional Inspections and Testing 3.18,4.1.2,4.2,5.2,6.2.2,7 8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5, > I 9.4.2,9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 rr Additional Time,Claims for Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors ¢ 3.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,8.3.2, 15.1.6 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.3 Administration of the Contract Architect's Representations ci 1 3.1.3,4.2,9.4,9.5 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 ! Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Architect's Site Visits o L 1.1.1 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 . Aesthetic Effect Asbestos 3 4.2.13 10.3.1 0 L Allowances Attorneys'Fees " 3.8 3.18.1,9.6.8,9.10.2, 10.3.3 8 Applications for Payment Award of Separate Contracts 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.5.4,9.6.3,9.7,9.10 6.1.1,6.1.2 ,L Approvals Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 2.1.1,2.3.1,2.5,3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, Portions of the Work p� 3.12.10.1,4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.4.1 5.2 Er Arbitration Basic Definitions o 8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 1.1 ARCHITECT Bidding Requirements oL 4 1.1.1 Architect,Definition of Binding Dispute Resolution 4.1.1 8.3.1,9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, Architect,Extent of Authority 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 L 2.5,3.12.7,4.1.2,4.2,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.4,7.4,9.2, Bonds,Lien 9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.8,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 7.3.4.4,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.3 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Bonds,Performance,and Payment Architect,Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 L, 2.1.1,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1,4.2.2,4.2.3, Building Information Models Use and Reliance 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,5.2.1,7.4,9.4.2, 1.8 9.5.4,9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 Building Permit Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 3.7.1 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 Capitalization Architect's Administration of the Contract 1.3 3.1.3,3.7.4, 15.2,9.4.1,9.5 Certificate of Substantial Completion Architect's Approvals 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 j 2.5,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,4.2.7 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The �". ' American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 2 I registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) ` I Certificates for Payment Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.2.1,4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7, 3.7.4,4.2.8,8.3.1, 10.3 9.10.1,9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 Conditions of the Contract — Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 1.1.1,6.1.1,6.1.4 13.4.4 Consent,Written Certificates of Insurance 3.4.2,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.8.5,9.9.1, 9.1(1.2. 9.10.3. 13.2, 9.10.2 15.4.4.2 Change Orders Consolidation or Joinder 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.7.4, 3.8.2.3,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,5.2.3, 15.4.4 7.1.2,7.1.3,7.2,7.3.2,7.3.7,7.3.9,7.3.10,8.3.1, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Change Orders,Definition of 1.1.4,6 7.2.1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1 — 2.2.2,3.11,4.2.8,7,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, Construction Change Directives 11.5 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1.1,7.1.2,7.1.3,7.3, Claims,Definition of 9.3.1.1 _ 15.1.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's Claims,Notice of 3.10,3.11,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 1.6.2, 15.1.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts Q CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 5.4, 14.2.2.2 — 3.2.4,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.9,9.3.3,9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Continuing Contract Performance ate. a. Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.1.4 ¢ 15.4.1 Contract,Definition of 0) Claims for Additional Cost 1.1.2 o 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.4. 7.3.9,9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR o Claims for Additional Time SUSPENSION OF THE 0 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.4, 6.1.1,8.3.2,9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 5.4.1.1,5.4.2, 11.5, 14 ›i Concealed or Unknown Conditions,Claims for Contract Administration 0; 3.7.4 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 O Claims for Damages Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating 3.2.4,3.18, 8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, to cj 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1 c~.a Claims Subject to Arbitration Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of cc 15.4.1 1.5.2,2.3.6, 5.3 cn — Cleaning Up Contract Documents,Definition of p 3.15,6.3 1.1.1 o cc Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to Contract Sum O Li- 2.2.1,3.2.2,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,5.2.1,5.2.3, 2.2.2,2.2.4,3.7.4, 3.7.5,3.8,3.10.2,5.2.3,7.3,7.4, h 6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 9.1,9.2,9.4.2,9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, z Commencement of the Work,Definition of 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2,15.1.5,15.2.5 8.1.2 Contract Sum,Definition of — Communications 9.1 3.9.1,4.2.4 Contract Time Completion,Conditions Relating to 1.1.4,2.2.1,2.2.2,3.7.4, 3.7.5,3.10.2,5.2.3,6.1.5, 3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9, 8.2,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 7.2.1.3,7.3.1,7.3.5,7.3.6,7,7,7.3.10,7.4,8.1.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 8.2.1,8.2.3,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 9 Contract Time,Definition of Completion, Substantial 8.1.1 3.10.1,4.2.9,8.1.1, 8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, CONTRACTOR 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 3 Compliance with Laws Contractor,Definition of 2.3.2,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 3.1,6.1.2 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, Contractor's Construction and Submittal 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Schedules — 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.2.3,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 3 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order - / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) Contractor's Employees Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate 2.2.4,3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2.4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, Contractors 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 3.14.2,6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Contractor's Liability Insurance Damage to the Work 11.1 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors Damages,Claims for and Owner's Forces 3.2.4,3.18,6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.3, 12.2.4 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages for Delay 1.2.2,2.2.4,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,4.2.4,5,9.6.2,9.6.7, 6.2.3,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 8.1.2 1.1.2, 1.5,2.3.3,3.1.3, 3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of 3.5.1,3.7.4,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.2,5.2,6.2.2, 8.1.3 7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, Day,Definition of 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 8.1.4 Contractor's Representations Decisions of the Architect 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.5,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,6.3,7.3.4, Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the 7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.4.2, Work 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 --4 L 3.3.2,3.18,5.3,6.1.3,6.2,9.5.1, 10.2.8 Decisions to Withhold Certification > 0 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 Er` 3.2 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, ¢L Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Rejection and Correction of Si) 2.2.2,9.7 2.5,3.5,4.2.6,6.2.3,9.5.1,9.5.3,9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3, r3 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.10.4, 12.2.1 0 14.1 Definitions 0 i. Contractor's Submittals 1.1,2.1.1,3.1.1,3.5,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, 5.1, • h 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,9.2,9.3,9.8.2, 6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1, 8.1,9.1,9.8.1, 15.1.1 gL 9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Delays and Extensions of Time Contractor's Superintendent 3.2,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, ' 3.9, 10.2.6 10.3.2,10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 o Contractor's Supervision and Construction Digital Data Use and Transmission Procedures 1.7 rz 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4,7.1.3, Disputesco 7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 6.3,7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 z Coordination and Correlation Documents and Samples at the Site o 1.2,3.2.1,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 3.11 0� Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Drawings,Definition of O 1.5,2.3.6,3.11 1.1.5 z t. Copyrights Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of 1.5,3.17 3.11 Correction of Work Effective Date of Insurance 2.5,3.7.3,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2,12.2, 12.3, 8.2.2 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Emergencies Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 10.4, 14.1.1.2,15.1.5 1.2 Employees,Contractor's Cost,Definition of 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 7.3.4 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Costs Equipment,Labor,or Materials 2.5,3.2.4,3.7.3,3.8.2,3.15.2,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, , 7.3.3.3,7.3.4,7.3.8,7.3.9,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Cutting and Patching Execution and Progress of the Work 3.14,6.2.5 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.3.4,2.3.6,3.1,3.3.1,3.4.1,3.7.1, ... 3.10.1,3.12,3.14,4.2,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 4 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) I Extensions of Time Insurance,Stored Materials 3.2.4,3.7.4, 5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 9.3.2 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 INSURANCE AND BONDS Failure of Payment 11 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy Faulty Work 9.9.1 (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insured loss,Adjustment and Settlement of Final Completion and Final Payment 11.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.8.2,9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Intent of the Contract Documents Financial Arrangements,Owner's 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13 _ 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Interest GENERAL PROVISIONS 13.5 1 Interpretation Governing Law 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1, 5.1,6.1.2, 15.1.1 — 13.1 Interpretations,Written Guarantees(See Warranty) 4.2.11,4.2.12 Hazardous Materials and Substances Judgment on Final Award 10.2.4, 10.3 15.4.2 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers Labor and Materials,Equipment 5.2.1 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, Indemnification 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 0 3.17,3.18,9.6.8,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 ate. Information and Services Required of the Owner Labor Disputes 2.1.2,2.2,2.3,3.2.2,3.12.10.1,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, 8.3.1 u' 9.6.1,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, Laws and Regulations z 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 1.5,2.3.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4, o Initial Decision 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 0 15.2 15.4 H, — Initial Decision Maker,Definition of Liens 0 1.1.8 2.1.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 0 Initial Decision Maker,Decisions Limitations,Statutes of — 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 0 Initial Decision Maker,Extent of Authority Limitations of Liability 0 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 3.2.2,3.5,3.12.10,3.12.10.1,3.17,3.18.1,4.2.6, o injury or Damage to Person or Property 4.2.7,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7,9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, • z — 10.2.8, 10.4 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 0 Inspections Limitations of Time cc 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2, 9.8.3, 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2.7, 0 u� 9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 5.2,5.3,5.4.1,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, o Instructions to Bidders 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, z 1.1.1 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 Instructions to the Contractor Materials,Hazardous 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.8.1, 5.2.1,7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 10.2.4,10.3 Instruments of Service,Definition of Materials,Labor,Equipment and 1.1.7 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4.1,3.5,3.8.2, 3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, Insurance 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 6.1.1,7.3.4,8.2.2,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.2.5,11 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Insurance,Notice of Cancellation or Expiration Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Procedures of Construction Insurance,Contractor's Liability 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 11.1 Mechanic's Lien Insurance,Effective Date of 2.1.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Mediation — Insurance,Owner's Liability 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 11.2 15.4.1.1 Insurance,Property Minor Changes in the Work 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1,7.4 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 5 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41.04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Clean Up 13 6.3 Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.1 Award Separate Contracts Modifications to the Contract 6.1 1.1.1, 1.1.2,2.5,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1,9.7, Owner's Right to Stop the Work — 10.3.2 2.4 Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 6.2 14.3 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 14.2, 14.4 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications 2.4,2.5,3.5,4.2.6,6.2.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, and Other Instruments of Service 12.2 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5,2.3.6, 3.2.2,3.11,3.17,4.2.12, Notice 5.3 1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2,2.1.2,2.2.2.,2.2.3,2.2.4,2.5,3.2.4, Partial Occupancy or Use 3.3.1,3.7.4,3.7.5, 3.9.2,3.12.9,3.12.10,5.2.1,7.4, 9.6.6,9.9 8.2.2 9.6.8,9.7,9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, Patching,Cutting and 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 3.14,6.2.5 15.1.6, 15.4.1 Patents Q Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance 3.17 > 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Payment,Applications for c Notice of Claims 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3, 9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.7, 9.8.5,9.10.1, a . 1.6.2,2.1.2,3.7.4,9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 LI 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Payment,Certificates for Notice of Testing and Inspections 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7,9.10.1, 0L 13.4.1, 13.4.2 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Observations,Contractor's Payment,Failure of i- 3.2,3.7.4 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 o` Occupancy Payment,Final L 2.3.1,9.6.6,9.8 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 " ` Orders,Written Payment Bond,Performance Bond and p 1.1.1,2.4,3.9.2,7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2 14.3.1 Payments,Progress �L OWNER 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 2 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION zL Owner,Definition of 9 2.1.1 Payments to Subcontractors o Owner,Evidence of Financial Arrangements 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 PCB z Owner,Information and Services Required of the 10.3.1 L 2.1.2,2.2,2.3,3.2.2,3.12.10,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2, Performance Bond and Payment Bond 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws L Owner's Authority 2.3.1,3.7,3.13,7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 1.5,2.1.1,2.3.32.4,2.5,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2, PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF 4.1.2,4.2.4,4.2.9, 5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1,6.1,6.3,7.2.1, 10 7.3.1,8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2,9.5.1,9.6.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 10.3.1 15.2.7 Product Data,Definition of Owner's Insurance 3.12.2 11.2 Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 Progress and Completion Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 4.2.2,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 2.5, 14.2.2 Progress Payments 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The .... i American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 6 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) ... r` Project,Definition of Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2 Project Representatives Separate Contractors,Definition of — 4.2.10 6.1.1 Property Insurance Shop Drawings,Definition of 10.2.5, 11.2 3.12.1 Proposal Requirements Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples — 1.1.1 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Site,Use of 10 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Regulations and Laws Site Inspections 1.5,2.3.2,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4,9.9.1, 3.2.2,3.3.3,3.7.1,3.7.4,4.2,9.9.2,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.4 10.2.2, 13.1,13.3,13.4.1,13.4.2,13.5,14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Site Visits,Architect's Rejection of Work 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 — 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Special Inspections and Testing Releases and Waivers of Liens 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 9.3.1,9.10.2 Specifications,Definition of Representations 1.1.6 3.2.1,3.5,3.12.6,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Specifications Representatives 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5,3.12.10,3.17,4.2.14 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.10, 13.2.1 Statute of Limitations 0 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 a 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.2,4.2.3, 5.3,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 Stopping the Work a Retainage 2.2.2,2.4,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 r-' 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Stored Materials 5 z Review of Contract Documents and Field 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 D Conditions by Contractor Subcontractor,Definition of o 3.2,3.12.7,6.1.3 5.1.1 s-i — Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and SUBCONTRACTORS x Architect 5 O 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2, 5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 Subcontractors,Work by Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,3.18,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, o by Contractor 9.6.7 0 3.12 Subcontractual Relations it Rights and Remedies 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 c- - 1.1.2,2.4,2.5,3.5,3.7.4,3.15.2,4.2.6,5.3,5.4,6.1, Submittals O 6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.4,9.2,9.3,9.8, 0 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 O u_ Royalties,Patents and Copyrights Submittal Schedule �- 0 3.17 3.10.2,3.12.5,4.2.7 z Rules and Notices for Arbitration Subrogation,Waivers of 15.4.1 6.1.1, 11.3 — Safety of Persons and Property Substances,Hazardous 10.2, 10.4 10.3 Safety Precautions and Programs Substantial Completion 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 12.2, Samples,Definition of 15.1.2 3.12.3 Substantial Completion,Definition of Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and 9.8.1 — 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Substitution of Subcontractors Samples at the Site,Documents and 5.2.3,5.2.4 3.11 Substitution of Architect Schedule of Values 2.3.3 — 9.2,9.3.1 Substitutions of Materials Schedules,Construction 3.4.2,3.5,7.3.8 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 5.1.2 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 7 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41.04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) , .— Subsurface Conditions Time Limits 3.7.4 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2, Successors and Assigns 5.2,5.3,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1, 13.2 9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, Superintendent 15.1.3, 15.4 3.9, 10.2.6 Time Limits on Claims i Supervision and Construction Procedures 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4,7.1.3, Title to Work 7.3.4,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 9.3.2,9.3.3 .. Suppliers UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 1.5,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3,9.4.2, 9.5.4,9.6, 12 9.10.5, 14.2.1 Uncovering of Work Surety 12.1 �- i 5.4.1.2,9.6.8,9.8.5,9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, Unforeseen Conditions,Concealed or Unknown 15.2.7 3.7.4,8.3.1, 10.3 I Surety,Consent of Unit Prices 9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3 7.3.3.2,9.1.2 Surveys Use of Documents 1.1.7,2.3.4 1.1.1, 1.5,2.3.6,3.12.6,5.3 L Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Use of Site 14.3 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 > Suspension of the Work Values,Schedule of E a�3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3 9.2,9.3.1 a a I Suspension or Termination of the Contract Waiver of Claims by the Architect f. 5.4.1.1, 14 13.3.2 o Taxes Waiver of Claims by the Contractor L3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.4.4 9.10.5, 13.3.2,15.1.7 g Termination by the Contractor Waiver of Claims by the Owner '" . 14.1, 15.1.7 9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 �-', Termination by the Owner for Cause Waiver of Consequential Damages p L 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 14.2.4, 15.1.7 " t Termination by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Liens 9°L14.4 9.3,9.10.2,9.10.4 Termination of the Architect Waivers of Subrogation 2.3.3 6.1.1, 11.3 Termination of the Contractor Employment Warranty z 0` 14.2.2 3.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.4, 12.2.2, ccL 15.1.2 0 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Weather Delays I CONTRACT 8.3, 15.1.6.2 21 14 Work,Definition of i. Tests and Inspections 1.1.3 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3, Written Consent 9.9.2,9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 1.5.2,3.4.2,3.7.4, 3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.3.2,9.10.3, L TIME 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 8 Written Interpretations Time,Delays and Extensions of 4.2.11,4.2.12 3.2.4,3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, Written Orders 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 1.1.1,2.4,3.9,7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 Init. AIA Document A2016—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The .. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 8 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) ... ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement)and consist of the Agreement,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive,or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms,other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals,the Contractor's bid or proposal,or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. § 1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations,or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,(2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,or(4)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the p Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. § 1.1.3 The Work The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or z partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment,and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or o a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors. _ o § 1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules,and diagrams. 7 § 1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, o equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. b § 1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations,in any medium of expression now known or later developed,of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements.Instruments of Service may include,without limitation,studies,surveys,models, sketches,drawings,specifications,and other similar materials. § 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2.The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion .11 of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AlA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 9 registered trademarks and may not be used without pem This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions.If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law,or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable,then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable.In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed,to the fullest extent permitted by law,to give effect to the parties'intentions and purposes in executing the Contract. § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles,or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and articles L such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. cr § 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications,and Other Instruments of Service a. § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service,including the Drawings and Specifications,and retain all common law,statutory,and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor,Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or o distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be . construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'reserved rights. o L § 1.5.2 The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them,subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8,solely and exclusively for execution of the Work.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice,if 3 any,shown on the Instruments of Service.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without cn the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect,and the Architect's consultants. pL § 1.6 Notice § 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2,where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party,such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to L� whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person,by mail,by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement. § 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail,or by courier providing proof of delivery. § 1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document E203Tm-2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,to establish the protocols for the development,use,transmission,and exchange of digital data. Imp § 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of,or reliance on,all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of,and reliance on,the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203Tt_2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,and the requisite AIA Document Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The �.. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 10 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15.41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) G202TM_2013,Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form,shall be at the using or relying party's sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants,the authors of,or contributors to,the building information model,and each of their agents and employees. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 General § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization.Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner"means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor,within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of,or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. — § 2.2 Evidence of the Owner's Financial Arrangements § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such 0 evidence.If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately. 9) § 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract only if(1)the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; c� (2)the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to make payment when due; F- . or(3)a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence,as required,within fourteen days of the Contractor's request,the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and,in that 0 event,shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped.However,if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under(3)above,the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the 0 Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided.If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2,the 0 Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents. c? § 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2,the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. 2 § 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as"confidential,"the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person.However,the Contractor may disclose"confidential" information,after seven(7)days'notice to the Owner,where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity,or by court or arbitrator(s)order. The Contractor may also disclose "confidential" information to its employees,consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors,and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information. § 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements, assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture,or an entity lawfully practicing architecture,in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. Init. AIA Document A201®-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order 11 No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates,the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness.The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services. § 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.5 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails I I within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or o` neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, t correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to �' prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may,pursuant to Section 9.5.1,withhold or nullify a Certificate for O L Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services 0 made necessary by such default,neglect,or failure.If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such L i amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect,or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner,the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to cry Article 15. a L ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 2 § 3.1 General § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the z L Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed,if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. L § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract L i Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. § 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed,and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 12 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary,the Contractor shall,before starting each portion of the Work,carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work,and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.It is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional,unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15.If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner,subject to Section 15.1.7,as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.If the Contractor performs those o obligations,the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents,for differences between field measurements or conditions �¢ and the Contract Documents,or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, 05. ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities. c § 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures 8 § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for,and have control over,construction means,methods,techniques,sequences, o and procedures,and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give O specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods, 0 techniques, sequences,or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect,and shall propose alternative means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction.Unless the Architect objects tj to the Contractor's proposed alternative,the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means,methods, techniques,sequences,or procedures. p _ N § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, o Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for,or on behalf of,the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 Labor and Materials § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4,the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. Init. AIA Document A2016—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 13 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order - / No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents'Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.5 Warranty § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit.Work,materials,or L. equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective.The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.5.2 All material,equipment,or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner,or shall be transferable to the Owner,and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. § 3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 0 cc § 3.7 Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws c L § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits,fees,licenses,and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required L at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. 0 r § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 8 L § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules o and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions oL If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are(1)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions cc that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an o unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in b construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall promptly provide L notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for, performance of any part of the Work,will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or L Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor,stating the reasons.If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation,that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15. § 3.7.5 If,in the course of the Work,the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers,archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect.Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations.The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 14 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) i� § 3.8 Allowances § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit,and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;and .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 Superintendent § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. 0 cc a. § 3.9.2 The Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent.Within 14 days of receipt of the information,the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect(1)has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or(2)requires additional time for review.Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. c� § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, 0 which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. . 0 § 3.10 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules § 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall submit for the Owner's and Architect's cc information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including(1)the date of commencement of the Work,interim schedule milestone dates,and the date of 0 Substantial Completion; (2)an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and(3)the time required for cc completion of each portion of the Work.The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to 0 completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents.The schedule shall be revised at o appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project. Z § 3.10.2 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect's approval.The Architect's approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld.The submittal schedule shall(1)be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule,and(2)allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule,or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule,the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. § 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available,at the Project site,the Contract Documents,including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives,and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction,and the approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar required submittals.These shall be in electronic form or paper copy,available to the Architect and Owner,and Init. AIA Document A2016—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 15 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. § 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams, schedules,and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier,or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams,and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials,equipment,or workmanship,and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. .. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in L the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7.Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. 0 § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve,and submit to the a. Architect,Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents,in L accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors. ca § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals,the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has(1)reviewed and approved them,(2)determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and(3)checked and o L coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. L§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and cc review of Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals,until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. z 0 G� § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of O responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals,unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect .L j[ of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,or similar submittals,by the Architect's approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the absence of such notice,the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of j the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures.The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. § 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials,or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The L.. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 16 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) Lw. specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings,and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings,and other submittals related to the Work,designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications,and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. § 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor's design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria,the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect. § 3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,lawful orders of public authorities,and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 0-. a_ 0 § 3.14 Cutting and Patching § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting,or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.All areas requiring cutting,fitting,or patching shall be restored to the condition existing z prior to the cutting,fitting,or patching,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. Ca u § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed 1- s construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting,patching,or otherwise altering such construction,or by rr excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except 0i. with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold,from the Owner or a Separate Contractor,its consent to cutting or 0 otherwise altering the Work. <r § 3.15 Cleaning Up § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and zp rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove waste cr materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery,and surplus materials from and about o the Project. b § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. § 3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design,process,or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents,or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications,or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by,or made known to,the Contractor,the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the MA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 7 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 3.18 Indemnification § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses, and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim,damage,loss,or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they maybe liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss,or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation,or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts,or other employee benefit acts. L ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 General § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement. 0 0 § 4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities,and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents a shall not be restricted,modified,or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor,and Architect.Consent c� shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.2 Administration of the Contract � L ' § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be ›- an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment.The E.5 Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. L § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction,or as otherwise agreed with the Owner,to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully �. completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will not be required to make r} exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have p control over,charge of,or responsibility for the construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,or r` Lccfor the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 1-_ �� z § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits,the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,and promptly report to the Owner(1)known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2)known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and(3)defects and deficiencies observed in the Work.The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of,and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of,the Contractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect's services or professional responsibilities.The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project.Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect.Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 1$ registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3,whether or not the Work is fabricated,installed or completed. However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor,Subcontractors,suppliers, their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve,or take other appropriate action upon,the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5,and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.The Architect's approval of 0 a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. a a. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations z regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion;issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8;receive and forward to the c. Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. H C) § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the rr" duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives. o c.� cc § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under,and requirements of,the 0 Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests b will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. z § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of,and reasonably inferable from,the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either,and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If appropriate,the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents'are 19 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 Definitions § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor"does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. § 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work,including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design.Within 14 days of receipt of the information,the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect(1)has imm reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or(2)requires additional time for review.Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made ` reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor 0 has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but z rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be o issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no increase in the Contract Sum or _ Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in 5 submitting names as required. u_t § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor,person,or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be 0 performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume c' toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,including the responsibility for safety of the o Subcontractor's Work that the Contractor,by these Contract Documents,assumes toward the Owner and Architect. h Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract o Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies,and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into L similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. § 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts L § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner,provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. AIA Document A2016—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The i... Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 20 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligationss the Subcontractor's under the subcontract. ended for more than 30 days, ent,if the Work has been suspended from 30 suspension. § 5.4.2mpe sa io shalla assignment, adjusted for increases in cost resulting compensation be equitably the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a ent to the Owner under Owner Section the5.4 obligationsnaoror other the — su § 5.4.3 Upon assignor If the Owner assigns subcontract to a successor contractor c other entity,the Ownerer entity. ccesss shall neVerthelesosdremain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's shall nevertheless subcontract. TE CONTRACTORS — OR BY SEPARATEContracts separate ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNERthe Owner under 6.10wner's Right to Perform Construction and to mean Award Separateeta related to thee under Project with the § "Separate Contractor(s)" shall other contractors retained by — § re 6.1.1 en The term Pright to perform construction or op ca,and the rs retained under Conditions of thieContract t td ao substantially nd waiver to agreements.The O Separate Contractors � thoOwse own forces,and with gose provisions of the Conditions of the Contra f those of this Contract,including ect or other construction or operations on subrogation. onions of the Proj a ate contracts are awarded for different p Whena separate ct Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes eac co � § 61.2P u the site,the term"Contractor" in the Contra Separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. arate The nd participate Se rat any O coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each a § o.tr The Owner shallta provide the for trContractorContractorshall pal makeany who shall cooperate with them. reement.The construction o, Ownerz their constructio n chedu and utuol until a Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, after a jointcrate Contractors,and the Owner �i Separatedu Contractors he con its schedule deemed necessary used the Contractor,Sep revisions to 1z schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be by 0 _ operations �.. subsequently revised. when the Owner performs construction or op t D § 6.1.4 to t e roj otherwisetheprovided winr the own forces or with ep, the Owner or its Separate Contractors s that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract,including, z tad to the Project with the Owner's ations and tsforces or with Separate Contractors,10, 11,and 12. Uc rasa this Article 6,and Articles shall have the ingothers,those stated in Article 3, without excluding u § 6.2 Mutual Responsibility crate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and cc Contractor shall afford the Owner and Seance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the 0 § 6.2.1 The and perform the Contract Documents.Cor tra toof their nstrmat ctio andoequipment ^ Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by Contractor'sdepends for proper execution or results upon construction operat by the with uhot portion ofct theorpepromptly § 6 ne orI part Separate theContractor, Work prior to proceeding operations by the Work,Owner or Separate Owner e a Architect the Contractorneo shall, --� apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or with the Work shall oats the hatwould unsuitable for proper execution and results ofoh r Contractor's g is Work.Failure of the Contractor that render it Pots apparent discrepancies or defects prior or partially completed constitute Lute ano notify the Architect of Separate Contractor's completedom for ant that the Owner's or apparent. constitutt is fit an acknowledgment the Owner tor actor Separate nottces responsible are not constructio n fit and proper to receive the Contractor's by the The Contractor shall be discrepancies or defects in the construction or operationsa able to a Separate Contractor delays,improperly b timed activities or defective construction.te c e Owner shall be 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are _ responsibleee of to Contractor's rfor delays,improperly to the Contractor for costs thecurs of a Sep sell timed activities,damage to the Work or partially that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed art promptly remedy damagelyin Section 10 § 6.2.4l The Contractor shall of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided completed construction or to property21 1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963, ",191"and"AIA Contract Documents"2b are ri is©1911,1915, ""AIA,"the AIA Logo, AIA Document A201®—2017.COPY gy AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09118/2020 under Order Init. g one 5:41d in accordance with the AIA Contracte not be used withoutpermission. for s resale,is licensed fordo one-time use only,and may (1263231588) American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects," registered trademarks and expmires on 0 711 212 0 21,is not for ri ht aia.org. User N es283 which er report copyright violations,e-mail copy 9 — Documents"Terms of Service.To User Notes: i § 6.2.5 The Owner and each§ 6.2.5 d for the Contractoreah in Separate 3.14. t actor shall have the same responsibilities for § 6.3 Owner's cutting and patching as are dIf a dispute arises tgmton o Clean Up respective contracts for maintae ining the Separate Contractors,and the Owner as to Owner may contracts up the premises and surroundingshe materials and the Architect will allocate the cos mon area free fromresponsibility under their _ ARTICLE 7 waste materials and rubbish,the CHANGES IN THE g those responsible. § 7.1 General WORK § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may Contract, by Change Order, y be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without limitations stated in this Article Construction Change Directive oa t Doc form a minor change in th Work,subject to and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. invalidating the § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based the Change Directive re upon agreement ~ § order for a requires agreement y Owner and among the Owner,Contractor minor change r the Work the Architect and and Architect.bt. A y be issued bymay or may not be agreedA Construction § 7.1.3 Changes in the the Architect alone. to by the Contractor. Contractor proceed Work shall be promptly performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Construction shall Change Directive,dP om ly rier for a p orY with changes in the Work,unless otherwiseprovided minor change in the in the Change The § 7.2 Change Orders Work. g Order, '" § 7.2.1AChan e o g Order is a written " rr Architect stating their a instrument prepared byo_ 1 Bement upon all of the following the Architect and signed by ¢ o The change in the Work; the Owner, Contractor,and 2 1 0 2 The amount of the adjustment, 3 The extent of the adjustment if an any,in the Contract Sum; z� eand Y,in the Contract Time. § 7.3 Construction Change Directives cc C. ` § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared§Architect,.3.1A directing i change in tD e Work Time,or both. The Owner mayprior to agreement P P ed by the Architect and signed "'`" I on adjustment,if any, by the Owner and the Work within the general scope of the Contract Changeiof 0 by Construction Directive,without invalidating er in the Contract Sum or Contract of Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. consisting additions,deletions,or other revisions, Contracchanges e ,SL tr I 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence F Order. z of total a �' agreement on the terms of a Change 0 tr 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment o based on one of the Construction 1 following methods: to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be z f / Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supportedI permit evaluation; p p y .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents by sufficient substantiating L i 3 Cost to be determined in a or subsequentlyagreed data to percentage fee;or manner agreed upon; upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or .4 As provided in Section 7.3.4. § 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable ex the method for adjustment in the Contracteo Sum, ` the Work attributable to the change, an prefit as setforth in re the change,including,in amountofans set forth in h Contract um,savings of in case of increase in the Contract Sum g those performing case, th i and an amount form overhead and under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keepe Agreement,a reasonable amount. y prescribe,also itemized accounting together with appropriate Contract Documents accs for the uu and png dat,.Unlessuch form as the Arvided i eta e In such nsupporting tos otherwise provided in the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited the following: Init. AIA Document A201® "" American Institute ofA201® Architects Allr right©19rv1, 1915,1918,1925,1937,1951 trademarks mayThe"Amer, 1 e of Architects," ""AI ,"the 1966 1o," registered t a8e which anddis on not b used d With not for isslo•s licensed for one-time produced only, 154 1987 1997 Documents® hout permission.This documentAIA,..the AIA Logo `A201, 2007 and 2017 by The was by AIA so and"AIA Contract Documents"are •. Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mailFare at used in ETcc on 09/18/2020 under Order User Notes: and may22 copyri ht 9 only i 9 @aia.or . Y be used in accordance with the AIA Contract (1263231588) ^' required by agreement or custom, taxes,fringe benefits the Architect; applicable payroll to ee costs approved by incorporated or 1 Co workers'of labor,00m including Ppcost ofa transportation,the whether incorp Csts of compensation sun insurance, d employee including„2 Costs of materials,supplies,and equipment, consumed; nd equipment exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractorly -� .3 Rental costs of machinery a q permit fees,and sales,use,or similar taxes,dlrec or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,p _ related to the change;and personnel directly attributable to the change. .5 Costs of supervision and field office p make a Claim in — disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time,the Contractor may § 7.3.5 If the Contractor disa accordance with applicable provisionsof Article 15. promptly with the change in the Directive,the Contractor shall p ptlyproceedwith the method,ifs any, §Work involved receiptand ofd a e tCohetA chit Changeagreement or disagreement -- Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or vi d intheand advise t tion e the Contractor's provided in Conagreement therewith, . Contract Time. agreement shall signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's uch Directive �' § 7.3.7 A Construction Changea adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time orOrdeethod for determiningn. including Jd change that results a u> ang be effective immediately and shall be recorded as ac the Contractor to the Owner Archideletion or boththatradditions and in a net c� profit shall be figured z §decrease The amount tr credit to be allowed by a 7.3.8e,the allowance for overhead and � overin inthe Contract Sum thtutions are involved in a change, y covering related Work eo subs with respect to that change. �' on the basis of net increase,if any, e Directive to the Owner,the Contractor cThe ` Change for Pay § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction a ent for costs and a mint make nor Work det rm nd on forr tpu onstruction purposes monthly Change Directive in for Applicationspayment those o o — may request p yrofessional judgment, t� in the Architect's p certify for Architect paymentl the amountdthat the Architect determines, n fointerim determination of cost shall adjustthe Contract Sum o with Articnle b5 sir as certify cc reasonably justified.The Architect'st a to disagree and assert a Cl subject7-7 to the right of either party z a Change Order, the Architect concerning the c agree with a determination made by adjustments,such or otherwise reach agreement upon the e Orders may be � §adjustments When the OCwner and Contractor prepare a Changen Order.Chang ,y gementin the effectictve Sum and and the Architect c� '� Change Directive. z cc agreement shall be effecti f immediately t on �chitect will issued for all or any part o inor Changes in the Work 7.4 M Contract Time.The Architect's Documents the an es in the Work that are consistenhe ith the intent of the Contract and §The notinvolve nArchitect v may drusr minor changes en Work w1 do ro osed minor changeimplement the minorfor change an al be ini wri inthe the Cont Sum or an extensionsthat the proposed and shall not proceedintheo will a — changes or Cl t c writing.If C Contractor shall notify the Architectpp Contract Sum Work. If thet Time,the r performs notifysthera changeminorac without any .If Contractor performs the Work e Contract urn or Contract Time,or a minor change in the t orke will affect th prior notice to the Architect that such Chang — adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time. ARTICLE 8 TIME authorized adjustments,allotted in — § 8.1 Definitions provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise p Completion of the Work. — § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of t the Contract Documents for SubstantialhWork is the date established in the Agreement. letion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Comp 1987 1997 2007 and 2017 by The 1961,1963,1966,1970,1976, 23 1925,1937,1951,1958, the AIA Logo, ,1976,201,"198and ,19 7,2007 and 2017 by are rightsll reserved. ise ed "A19merican ""AIA,"AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyrightreduced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 0911812020 under Order permission.This document was p and may onlye used in accordance with the AIA Cod In it. American 32283 of h Architects. be used 1,tis not The"America licensed for one-time use only, AIA Contract registered trademarks and tiems on 0711212021,is for resale, ri ht aia.org. Docu ents°Termse which Sep report copyright violations,e-mail copy 9 °C Documents® of Service.To User Nodes: § 8.1.4 The term "day"as used in the Contract Documents shall m defined. mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically § 8.2 Progress and Completion § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence the Contractor confirms ` lrms that the Contract Time is a reasonable of e fConBy Contract. executing the Agreement, § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall notperiod for performing the Work. the Work prior the shall of insurance knowingly,exept by required agreemento be fu or instruction of the Owner furnished by the Contractor and writing,commence § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously within the Contract Time. caner. with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion § 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the § Cr ntrac or of an employee commencement or progress of the Work by ` of(3)theby Ownerlabor or Arc, i ecre,,of an al delay in deliveries, ither,or of a unavoidable to in accordance with Section unusual Palate Contractor; y fit an act or neglect (2)rs weather changes ordered in the Work; in accordance ,or other causes beyond the Contractor's control; casualties,adverse conditions documented mediation and binding dispute resolution;or 5 ` Owner pending determines,justify delay,mediation a (4)by delay may determine. then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonabauses that the letom asauth the Architectd by the asserts,and the § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordancetime as the ;L > Iwith applicableprovisions of cc § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery Article 15. a Contract Documents. ry of damages for delay �,, by either o Party under other provisions of the ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 Contract Sum z § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreemento` payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work unders orm and,including authorized Contract o is the total c� § 9.L21f unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently the Contract DocOant mnents. 0 contemplated are materially changed so that application of such prices to inequity to the at or Contractor,oe,the applicableunitprices agreed upon,and if unit prices shall be equitablye actual q quantities originally quantities causes substantial 0` § 9.2 Schedule of Values adjusted. Where the Contract is based on a stipulated0 cc schedule of values t the n aArchitect fre s fast Application sum or Guaranteed Maximum price,the Contractor shall submit � various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be n �� vario s por its softhshall for prepared in the allocating a the entire ContractbheSum to the accuracy,required bytheo a bassubsis for reviewing it the Contractor's Applications Architect This schedule form,and supported by the shall datae s submitted to the for Pa unless objected to byO Architect and supported Payment.Any changes to the schedule of values shall be used as � unless objected to by the Architect shall be used as a basis for reviewing ` by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Payment. Architect require, sand the Contractor's subsequent Applications for § 9.3 Applications for Payment § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress Architect an itemized Application for PaContractori P grescpayment,the eof ashall i required the Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if toSection 9.2,for completed portions of the Work. The a data substantiating the Contractor's right topayment pplication shall be notarized,if required,and su da aisubsta,and releases and ctor'srs h)tons o that the Subcontractors under provided for in the Contract Documents. caner or Architect require,such as copies SEE resupported by all and suppliers,and shall reflect retainage if § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9,such a the Work that haved been properly authorized applications may include requests for payment on seer Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. by Construction Change Directives,or interim account determinations o f e MA Document ®_ byn of the �' Init. A201 2017.Co American Institute of0 Architects.Copyright ll rights @ 1911,ry 1915, "1918, Amregiericantered trademarks and may not be used reserved. h 1925,19u7,te 1951ofAr,1958,1""Al 1,"th 196 o " 101,"and 7," 1A o7,2007 and men by The / American Institute of Architects,"^ No.8114132283 which expires onAIA."the 07/12/2021,sed without notupe fission. this document for one-time use only, AIA Logo,"t 15:41 Documents®Terms of Service. Produced by ALA software at 15:41 04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order To report coAIA Contract Documents"are �' User Notes: copyright violations,e- mailcopyright@aia.org. and may only be used in accordance with the AK Contract 24 (1263231588) r Work for which payment for portions of theyformed by others whom § o9.3.1.2 rdosnoApplications for Payme ent shall not include requestsf un ess s ch Work has been p Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, the Contractor intends to pay. in advance — the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment 9.3. Unless delivered otherwise providedin subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved suitably stored off the site at a location bytew er,paymentand suitably similarly bat ade for for and equipment may mint stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon by the Owner, Payment for materials and equipment the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials complagreediance anup e inb he Contractor Y procedures satisfactoryapplicable insurance,t such materials c nd equipment theotherwise with or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,d equip ent stor doff the sl gists ofapp — ge, and and transportation to the site,for such materialsApplication for Payment will pass to the Owner no upon submittal of an Application for Owner no y t § 9.3than thee Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered an PP received from the or interests,Payment oro The Contractor Peen prwarrants i issued and payments — later than time of payment. have been p provided labor, all information,and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims,sec Work for which Certificates for Payment or other persons or entities that the umt rao the,i Contractor's of eContractor, knowledge, encumbrances,in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,suppliers, > equipment relating to the Work. ec o materials,and — Application for Payment,either(1)issuea § 9.4 Certificates for Payment to the �, Application for Payment,with a copy is properly 9.4.1 wn r a Certificate will,within seven in hafter ull receipt of the App icati fo the Architect acopyt § Payment for such amountcertificationArchitectdetermines part provided edln _ to the Owner a Certificate for Payment0 S Contractor;or(2)issue to the and Ownerwner a Certificateothefor Architect's55 lication for Payment,and notify the Contractor and Owner e and notify the Contractor and oof thf e t eAppreasons for withholding due, withhold certification of theou 9.5.1;or(3) certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. c� { based of Architect's reason for withholding Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, Application for on by the Architect it best t z 0 § 9the Architect'sissuance of a evaCeluation ofcheate for ro es to theP point, hthat,to theoe st ofy theo the o Architect's— h nwdge,in the Work and the data in the a eat in the amount on knowledge,information,and belief,the Work hasp progressed D t to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract accordance with the Contract Documents,and that the Contractor is entitled tOO correction of minor ct Work is in re resentations are subject ressio tm Architect. z certified.The foregoing p Completion,to results of subsequent testeC�d goal fications exp (1)made 0 Documents upon the Contractl Documentsomp completion,and to specific c� representation that the Architect has deviations he issuance ofact f prior to comp of tha Work;chi reviewed cmatruction o However,the continuousf a Certificatensp cti Payment to check will the not be or quantityrequisitions received from ,� inspections to qualitya mint; c3 means, e exhaustive methods, chniqes on-sitee u ri es,or procedures;(3)reviewed copies of Subco, techniques,supplierslier,sequences, previously right paid on and other data requested by the Owner1t ontraetor has used money Contractor's the rig t to p or(4)mractors and —' or(4)mad the ContractsSum.ascertain how or for what purpose account of 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to § Section9.yn.2 cannotessa t § o.ec.1 TheOwner,Architectf may withholdrahto a Certificatenion for resentations to the Owner required Architect will notify the in the amount of the Application, e protect the if in the Architect's opinion the rep agree on a revised amount, Cone.If the Architect is unable to certify payment t uentl Contractor and Owner providedas for the amount for which the Architecte is able to make such in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect canna e of tl issue a Certificate for Payment or, the representtectations s will promptlyr.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Paymentor, issued,ecausto such extent as r iscose red evi e the mayOw nulli y the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously — discovered evidence,,may Architect' opinion to protect the Owner from loss for ic the Contractor is responsible, may be necessary in the Arm actse P 3.3.2, including loss resulting from and omissions described in Section of such claims,unless security .1 defective Work not remedied; robable filing _ .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidencethe Con as tog p for labor,materials acceptable to the Owner is provided by .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers or equipment; 1970 1976 1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The 25 1958,1961,1963,1966, o „,197•and"AIA Contract and 2017 by are c 1915,1918,1925,1937,1951, •"AIA;'the AIA Log AIA Document toA o Architects. 2tect Copyright reserved.191 Institute AIA IAso Logo,re A 01," n "A on ant act Do under s"O are Init. not be used without permission.This document was produced b t used in a Torn 0911nce /20with t0 e AIA Contract rder American 32283 hi h e ets.All ri eta01,is nThe"Americanlicensed for one-time use only,and may only lA(1263231588) registered trademarks and m on 0711212021,is not for resale, ri ht aia.org. 1 No.User No es283 which expiresreport copyright violations,e-mail copy 9 oc Documents®Terms of Service.To Notes: •4 reasonable evidence 5 that the Work cannot be completed for the damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor; P •6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completedunpaid balance of the Contract Sum; balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for 7 within the Contract Time, repeated failure to carryand that the out the Work in accordance with the Contract Doc the anticipated delay;or § 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect's decision regardinga Documents. whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1,in § t h.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, 15. withheld. certification will be made for amounts previously 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for issue joint I h the Contractorthhls and to payment under Section 9.5.1.3,the Owner may, payment f checksr Work properly any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed yt check,the Ownererl shall performed theArchitect ate al or o eqe at its pale option, for Paequipment suitably delivered.If the Owner maks to make yment, Contractor shall reflect such a Payments by payment on its next application § 9.6 Progress Payments _ § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate §within 9.6. the er t e Arcprovihed in the ssuedact Doc oum for Payment,the Owner shall make a Documents,and shall so notify payment in the manner and§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor,no later than seven the Architect a the to which Subcontractor entitled,reflecting o a. the amountctor on hich theo ub on Subcontractor's isor's days after receipt of payment witho each Son accountutor, theh Su each Subcontractor to mak Work. The actually retainedshall, erifrom the Owner, Portion of the The Contractor bypayments to the appropriate agreement Li eL payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. _� � § 9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable, _ completion or amounts applied forby of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. and action taken thereonl by the Architect and Ow regardingormation percentages nt Owner on account c�` § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractorcr §Subcontractors9.6.4 The and suppliers i amounts bythe fails to subcontracted that tee Contractor Iffs properly Owner to the l have theer forhtoact Work. the anddntractor rash such evidence within seven days,the OwnerY paid suppliers to whether they � 3' shall have right to contact Subcontractors to suppliers or to see ascertainto the payment have been properly paid.Neither the Owner ' of money to,a Subcontractor or supplier,except as may otherwise be nor Architect shall have an obligation � § 9.6.5 The Contractor's aco payments to suppliers shall be treated in a required by law. co F§ 9.6.and 9,6.4, z manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, c) c� 9.6.6 A Certificate for Pa c� Owner shall not constitute acceptance Payment,a progresspayment, rpartialr-- i cs or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the _ planer of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. z § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner Paymentst received Cy the Corprotor for Work properly apayment pay e tse ceived bye hoe tho trse ctor for Work s o erly ers wee bondinthe full Subcontractors penalorrovi of the Contract Sum, Y performed by o u provided by suppliers shall be heldunder contract with the Contractor for which performed Work or furnished materials,or to b payment was made the Owner.Nothing corer,c ed hereinan shall require money with in a separate account and not commingledon with money of the Contractor,create any fiduciary both, punitive damages against the Contractor forbreach of the requirements of thisntractor for breach of trust,or provision. _ any person or entity to an award of § 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its paymenthis provision. § 9.6. andi indemnify obligations under the Contract Doc defend expenses,arising Owner e f f y lien loss,m all obiliher claim tY>damage or expense,including reasonable attorneys fees ctor and litigatitier. Upon , notice of a lien claim clor other claim forfor a receipt applicable when required, Contractor P the Owner thent by any shallSu notify they or supper. of any Contra payment,r maysubst lute a surety bond for the e property If approvedr the byre the other applicable for court,when has then asserted. Init. '41A Document g2p1® P P i ty against .. —2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976, 1987,1997 American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The" 7 Amican and may be see without American Institute of Architects,"" registered t trademarksade ich expiresnd on not used w tis hou t for resale,is licensed for one-time use only, 20/207 and under b Documents®Terms of Service.To report co permission.This document was produced 'the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents" User Notes: by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 Order tonight violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. y and may26 only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract (1263231588) after 9.7 Failure of Payment Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor, or,within thin daysseven days § Payment,or if the Owner does not pay Contractort awarded seven binding If the Architect does not issue 1'cation for aft— er the the Contractor's Application ndin and may,upon seven additional days'notice e shalle Ownerbe extended appropriately Architect, t,stopd the after date established in the Contract Documents,the amount certifiedt byn adlay a dispute resolution,then the Contractorhas been received.The Contra Work until payment of the amounte owing the Contract Sum sha ll be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown, — start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Doc of the Work when the Work or designated thereof is § 9.8 1 Substantial lCompletion Completionor d portionilize the Work for sufficiently 9 .1SubscomplCompletionis nce stage in progresstheect — complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy co p its intended use. agrees to accept portion thereof which the Owner comprehensive list of § para9.8.2 When scontractor complete,pee thes Contractorat the Work,or Failure to include toan theitein c such lista does not e the substantially shall prepare and submit to Architect a � separately,is prior to final payment. ¢ items s be completedfh orn correctedco - of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Detained — responsibility inspection to determine whether the Work or item,whether or not c complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any sn cc g.g designated.3 Upon receipt ofther the Contractor's list,the Architect will make ri a o dance with the Contract Documents so ncud theion Contractor'sc is substantially is complete the shall, upon— , notification Contractor the z included on list,which not sufficiently com fete or correct such item � can occupy or utilize the Work or desige�ion,p omlpn thereof for its intended theeArchitect to determine q that the Owner inspection by before issuance.Iu h cas the ,theCert rate Contractor shall Substantial Completion, Arc hitect.In such case,the shall then submit a request for another � Substantial Completion. complete,the wil will of thecate o § 9.8.4 When the Work or designa ted portion thereof is substantially comp letione Architectrchitsh responsibilities . — of Substantial Completiondamage to the Work and insurance;and fix the time � that shall establish the date of Substantial Comp the Certificate.Warranties required hereof 0 Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities, Completion of the Work or designated portion within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying .73 cc Completion. ca — unless Contract Documentsro shahcommencein Certificate of Substantial Compubstantial omp c unless otherwise provideif � Substantial Completion shall be submitted to such he Owner ce and Contractor and consent their written 0 § ce t Theof Certificateepon itinsassignede,and c.Such of sure t any,l ,^ to them in the Certificate.Upono acceptance responsibilities e applying to the Work or designated portionz the Owner shall make payment of retainag of the Contract Documents. adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements one or Use partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when § 9.9 Partial Occupancy occupy or use any completed or p Y provided such is to § 9.9.1h portion The Owners mayProject.Such occupancypa oral use is consented or use is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, such public authorities having jurisdiction over the — by may c insurer and whether rby complete,provided the Owner and security,maintenance, ve portion is substantially payments,retainage,if any, commence wg t the responsibilities not the ed to each of them for p ym concerning the ,secuperiod for n accepted in writim oWoka insure — heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing f ent of warranties required by the Contract Documents.istt ts.th Architect Contractore as pr considers residers a the i n substantially and commence let, t e Contractor shall prepare and submit under porton t complete, to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of — Sectionprogress of the Work h l be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no the the Work seal agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. partial occupancy or use, — the Owner,Contractor,and Architect shall jointly inspect § e.are to be Immediately prior to such portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. the area to be occupied or 1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The 27 _ 1937,1951,1958,1961,1963, o „,197" "AIA Contract 1918,1925, °AIA"the AIA Log ®_201 t All Copyright©191 a 1915, AIA IA Logo, 01,"and ET A Contract Documents"under O are AIA Document A201t was produced by onlyat used in accordance T09/18/2020 with the AIA Coder Init. not be used/20without permission.resale,is licensed his n for none-time use only,and may lA Contract American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The American Institute of Architects," registered trademarks and mayre-mail not copyright@aia.org. / No.8114132283r Nt which expires on 071102�OoPynght vio�ations Documents®Terms of Service.To rep User Notes: § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, _ acceptance of Work not complying partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not co with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 Final Completion and Final Pa constitute § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice that the Work is ready receipt of a final Application +" the Work acceptableal liati for r Payment,Documents and forksfiuch inspection and acceptance and upon the Architect will promptly make such inspection.When issue a final der the Contact the Contract fully performed,the the Architect fords on the basisa Certificateo the a for Pa mente stating visits inspections,the Work has ' that to the best of the Architect's Architect will promptly on the Documents and that the-siteentir balances andinspections, ound to be due the Work knowledge, been and not completed in accordance Certificate is dud and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for ue in Section e astea further noted in thewith the precedent to the Contractor's bein Payment wille to finalle a paymentrepresentation that conditions listed § 9.10.2 Neither final paymentg entitled to have been fulfilled. the Architect(1) nor any remaining tetained percentage shall become due an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other the Work for which the Owner or the O until the Contractor submits to Documents Owner)have been Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered amounts(less e withheld with by Owner) tare been in paid orce otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required _ knows of no reason that the insurance will not en renewable to cover al payment is currently in effect,(3) the the Contract b consent of to final ( )a written statement that Contractor warra(4)warranties oro surety, Subcontractor warranties,andi the period required n ies of specific obligations,usuch ast receipts and a documentation if f of by the special w by the Contract Doc P warranties,such as manufacturersnts, (6) ndwai required Owner,other datauric establishing interests, encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may ,` . refuses to furnish a release or waiver eent and waivers of liens,claims,security satisfactory ty rpaYrnent or a , ry Subcontractor the Owner to rode required bythe O Contractorthe designated b r cri mnify the Owner against such ien,claim,security terest,or encu e Owner If l a claim,security interest,or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after pa me the Owner ail mnt e e that then umba ce be como furnish a bonda �. encumbrance.If a lien, the Owner all money th all Owners and may be reasonable attorneys'fees, payments are made,the Contractor,securityintershall s pay in discharging the lien,claim, interest,or to § 9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion 0 L. § the Contractor u byst issuance Co of Change Orders affectingk, ` Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification byth thereof is materially delayed through no fault Contract,make payment final completion,and the Architect ut tesorminating con r the remaining balance of the glance due for that e Architect, ems,the o portion of the Work fully completed,t corrected,d i and Contract If Documents,and if bonds have been not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the _� o portion of Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted bythe -.furn ..,-,- Contract, the written consent of the surety to a p certification o the of suchpayment Such paymentpayment of the balance due for that z. shall made under terms and conditions the Architect prior to z cxrept that it shall not tuS a sClaims.11b governingf final payment, o § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims 0�- liens,Claims,security interests,or encumbrances arising out of the .2 by the Owner except those arising failure of the Work to comply with the rep from .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; Contract and unsettled; 4 requirements of the Contract Documents; audits performed bythe Owner,if e permitted by the Contract Doc or § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final paymentDocuments,after finalpayment. by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,or a su e a waiver f claims by that payee except those previously made in writing final Application for except and identified by Pplier,shay unsettled at them o that payee as unsettled time of t. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining,and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for prevent damage,injury, safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to or ost to Init. AlA Document A201® —2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The" Amricanofand may be usedAmerican Institute of Architects," registered t trademarksade which expiresnd not used without s not for mission is licensed fort was produced r use only, 20 and 1 r b _ Documents®Terms of Service.To report co permission.This document was produce b the qlA Logo,%42p1," y The User Notes: y AlA software at 15: 41 04 ETl on 09/18/2020 underContract tOrder copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org, y and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract s"are 28 (1263231588) on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; — .1 employeeswhether in storage on or off the site, 2 the Work and materialsdy, and equipment o tr incorporatedtor,aucntracto, lawns,a S walks,pavements,,roadways, under care,custody,or control of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,or aSub-subcontractor;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs, struc tures,and utilities not designated for removal,relocation,or replacement in the course of construction. give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, comply with,and on safety of persons or property or thew §rules andn The Contractort ,and shall lo public authorities,bearing regulations, lawful orders of protection from damage,injury,or loss. conditions and of existing implement,erect,and maintain,as required by yi danger csionditions ns and other performance warnings the 10 Contract,The Contractor shall safety and protection,including posting hazards;promulgating safeguards foegula ons;and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of against promulgating safety gu - the safeguards. exercise utmost care and carry on suchu activities under 10.2.4 § cssa When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous ex materials or equipment,or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall < personnel• supervision of properly qualifiedcr e or loss insured under property � roe referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused lo ed b � § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than amag t o a. or n yd thy the Conctor, Subco tra)to p p riY em liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under z or in by the Contractor,aSubcontractor,aSub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly lose to the z wholepartbethe damage any Sections them, .1.2 anyone for whose acts they may make a Claim for the cost to remedy of directly or 0 — etet .d m ge loss s The Contractorc may be oable,and not attributableor to extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyoner by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may • o ` indirectly employedobli obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing g 0{ Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. c 0— Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated u The Contractor shall designate a responsible memberof the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty §shallbe10.2.6 TD be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be theCC — by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. co z partI— of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or 0 § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any cc create an unsafe condition. a. u. or of p § 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property z toperson or property because of an act or omission h floe the otnoh r p insured,,shall be if either party suffers injury orisdamagelegor damage, art is le all res responsible,notice of the injury s after discovery.The notice shall provide -' othersr for whose opts sowch p y g Y p given to the other party within a reasanab�oe time t gate the matter. Y sufficient detail to enable the other party § 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance Contractor encrequirementsounters hazardous material o� Documentssubct stance ot regarding ddsehazardousntheCotracmatt Docsuments or substances.and if.If — substance,including but not limited to or the addressed in Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable b t Y injury or death to persons resulting from a material orasbestos recognizing r polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB),encountered affect d area and notify the Owner and Architect r,the Contractor ofthe condition. condition,immediately stop Work in the .2 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice,the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the 10 r p the Contractor and,in the event such material Contract or presence or absence of the material or substance reported by -. substance is found to be present,to cause it to be rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect 2017 will l The ®_ Copyright01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,19� 29 � Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are MA Document Institute o1 2tect Init. American o Architects.All rights reserved.shed.The"American Instituteof aects,""AIA,"b the AIA 21 is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order / No.8114132283 which expires on 07112/ aia.or (1263231588) Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@ g User Notes: promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have J n to the persons or entities When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area entity proposed by the reemhe of the Ownersu s a substance has ee.By nol reasonable objection, agreement Sum shall be and Co Change Order,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately upon and the Contracta tup. by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown delay, nd § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of anyof them damages,losses, and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,and hold harmless the Contractor, performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents from and against claims, death m ncdescribedth in WoSectionrk 10.3.1 and re not ded or harmless, rarceing out or resultingfromd death as is riba t bodilyinjury, the risk claim,uch damage,injury or J ry,sickness,disease or death, or to injury to ortdestruct on of tangible open the p(other thanythe Work itself), mnity except to the extent that such damage,loss,or expense is due the party seeking indemnity, to the fault or negligence of § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents,or substances the the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. Documents.The Owner except to the extent of I § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner > I hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, for the cost and expense the Owner incurs(1)for remediation of Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1,except to the extent that a i. a. to the Owner's fault or negligence. or(2)where the ¢ the cost and expense are due � § 10.3.6 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable rothe cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the p rty,the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for by a government agency for all cost andthereby expense incurred. o § 10.4 Emergenciesce In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to o injury,or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor L account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. c� o prevent threatened damage,injuon ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 Contractor's Insurance and Bonds o" § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the o endorsements,and subject to the terms and conditions,as described in the Agreement or elsewhere types and limits of liability,containing the Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project in the Contract zI company h P Owner,Architect, and Architect's consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor's commercialgeneral liability is located. The ` policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the re ui .. tyfrom a company or companies lawfullypes,ure for such penal sums,and subject to such terms and located. ry bonds in the jurisdiction where the Projectbsnds authorized to issue INENI § 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds shall promptly furnish a copy to be furnished. covering payment of copy of the bonds or shall authorize a 1,...obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor § 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor's Required Insurance.Within three 3 bus' ess days of the Y date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of an insurance required by the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impendingor m actual Init. or AIA Document A2016—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918 1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2t017 y American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo," � registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document wasproduced No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract The o9 A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyrightby AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order 30 User Notes: violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. (1263231588) �.. expiration.Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor,the Owner shall,unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner,have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage. § 11.2 Owner's Insurance § 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability,containing the endorsements,and subject to the terms and conditions,as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance.If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance,with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.Upon receipt of notice from the Owner,the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work.When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage,the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner.The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order.If the Owner does -1 not provide written notice,and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or o maintain the required insurance,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto. g § 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner's Required Property Insurance.Within three(3)business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual c� cancellation or expiration.Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1)the F� . Contractor,upon receipt of notice from the Owner,shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has 5 cc been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor;(2)the Contract Time O and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted;and(3)the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors,and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance p had it not expired or been cancelled.If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage,the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order.The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the cc Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance. 0 § 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation § 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcontractors, O sub-subcontractors,agents,and employees,each of the other;(2)the Architect and Architect's consultants;and(3) O Separate Contractors,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents,and employees,for damages z caused by fire,or other causes of loss,to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect,Architect's consultants,Separate Contractors,subcontractors,and sub-subcontractors.The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation.This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity(1)even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise,(2)even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or(3)whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. §11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,to the extent permissible by such policies,the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 31 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of .w use of the Owner's property,or the inability to conduct normal operations,due to fire or other causes of loss.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner's property,due to fire or other hazards however caused. §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2.The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner,and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss,the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds.The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds.If the Contractor does not object,the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation.Upon receipt,the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions.Thereafter,if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience,the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose.If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the 0 proceeds,the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss,and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15.Pending resolution of any ¢L dispute,the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed I Work. z ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK o § 12.1 Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically Lexpressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if requested in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the 0 Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. O § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If such 6.. Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the ccrs Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract 0 Documents,the costs of uncovering the Work,and the cost of correction,shall be at the Contractor's expense. 0 § 12.2 Correction of Work § 12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion Z I The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the �• Contract Documents,discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections,the cost of uncovering and replacement,and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so,unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The ... American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 32 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. - § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors,whether completed or partially completed,caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be p sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's a. liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. a § 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as 0 appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS tL § 13.1 Governing Law • The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located,excluding that jurisdiction's p choice of law rules.If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. cc rn § 13.2 Successors and Assigns § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns,and legal cr representatives to covenants,agreements,and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in LL Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. �- If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally z0 responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project,if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. § 13.3 Rights and Remedies § 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights,and remedies otherwise imposed or available — by law. § 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect,or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 33 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 13.4 Tests and Inspections § 13.4.1 Tests,inspections,and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules,and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections,and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections,and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of tests,inspections,or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded.The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests,inspections,or 4. approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require. § 13.4.2 If the Architect,Owner,or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,inspection,or approval not included under Section 13.4.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection,or approval,by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner's expense. § 13.4.3 If procedures for testing,inspection,or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure,including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses,shall p be at the Contractor's expense. § 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection,or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract r-'; Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. z § 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections,or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. ; er § 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid L L unreasonable delay in the Work. z 0 § 13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the �- parties agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where z the Project is located. 0 ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 Termination by the Contractor a § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through z L no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work,for any of the following reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency,that requires all Work to be stopped; .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions,delays,or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3,constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any .. 365-day period,whichever is less. AIA Document A2015—2017.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The 4• Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 34 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) 1r. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days'notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed,as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of a public authority;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist,and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,the Owner may,without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the p Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days' notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon written request 0 of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred t by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. p I- c) § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for cc the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not co expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, o the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case cc may be,shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall 0 survive termination of the Contract. 0 z § 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience § 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay,or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is,was,or would have been,so suspended,delayed,or interrupted,by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 35 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documentse Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed;costs incurred by reason of the termination,including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts;and the termination fee,if any, set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,payment of money,a change in the Contract Time,or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.The responsibility Ism to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims w The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or 0 related to the Contract,whether in contract,tort,breach of warranty or otherwise,in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, Q but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work.The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2. § 15.1.3 Notice of Claims o § 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor,where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered ›- prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2,shall be initiated by notice to the U other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the 0 L Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition 0 giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later. C § 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor,where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2,shall be initiated by notice to the p other party.In such event,no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required. �' 0 § 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance b § 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim,except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Z Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to �. make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker's decision,subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15.The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost E If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay,only one Claim is necessary. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 36 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably anticipated,and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,fmancing, business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit,except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either parry's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 Initial Decision § 15.2.1 Claims,excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4,and 11.5,shall be U cc —� referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision.The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker,unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement.Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1,an initial decision a shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim.If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker,the party asserting the Claim may demand E3 mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered.Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree,the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons c� or entities other than the Owner. r occ § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more 0 of the following actions:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5) O advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that,in the Initial cc Decision Maker's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. O § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims,the Initial Decision Maker may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision O Maker in rendering a decision.The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such o persons at the Owner's expense. z § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of the request,and shall either(1)provide a response on the requested supporting data,(2)advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished,or(3)advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim,or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim.This initial decision shall(1)be in writing;(2)state the reasons therefor;and(3)notify the parties and the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker,of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and,if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation,to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time,subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 37 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 15.2.6.1 Either party may,within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision,demand in writing that the other party file for mediation.If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof,then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Owner may, but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims,disputes,or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract,except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4,9.10.5,and 15.1.7,shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement.A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation.The 0 request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but,in such event, cr mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings,which shall be stayed pending ¢L mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2,the parties may nonetheless proceed to the _ selection of the arbitrator(s)and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. L § 15.3.3 Either party may,within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute,demand in writing that the C? other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to 2 L file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof,then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. o § 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place L where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall cFn be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. p§ 15.4 ArbitrationL § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement,any b Claim subject to,but not resolved by,mediation shall be subject to arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree z otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry __ Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement.The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration.The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request forlaw mediation,but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations.For statute of limitations purposes,receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ... Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 38 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement,shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules,either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that(1)the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation,(2)the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact,and(3)the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules,either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration,provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim,dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4,whether by joinder or consolidation,the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. ct s (1) U z 0 0 • - i C3 CCE 0 U 0 t3 CC H U: 0 V 0 CC 2 u_ 0 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 39 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 15:41:04 ET on 09/18/2020 under Order No.8114132283 which expires on 07/12/2021,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1263231588) SECTION 00 7300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY — A. These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions defined in Document 00 7200 - General Conditions and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. Provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. B. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions that are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1.02 MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.03 MODIFICATIONS TO AIA A201 1.04 ARTICLE 1.1 - BASIC DEFINITIONS — A. 1.1.9 Workmanship: 1. The degree of skill in which the Work is completed. 2. All Work is to be completed in a professional manner by a skilled and experienced craftsman in accordance with the manufacturer's are to be installations lled parallel or pions. erpendicularto the 3. All pipes, conduits, ducts, and supports building lines while maintaining the integrity of the installation. cJ 1.05 ARTICLE 1.2 -CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS o n A. 1.2.1.1 Add Subparagraph: a. 1. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided— z in accordance with the engineer/architect's interpretation without change in the contract a c. sum. 6 1.06 ARTICLE 3.6 -TAXES 6— A. Add the following subparagraph:1. 3.6.1: Purchasers for material supplies will be given a sales tax exempt number to C1 2 exempt the requirement of sales tax for materials supplied for this project, therefore c bidders should not include sales tax in their bid amounts, as law would allow. -` 2. Building Materials Sales Tax and Use Tax: 0 a. Contractors are to follow Senate Bill 227; ACT 77.54 regarding sales and use tax for m the purchase of building materials.b. Senate Bill 227; ACT 77.54 (9M)of the statutes; Relating to: a sales and use tax co �o exemption for building materials that become a part of the facility for a local unit of m government or nonprofit organization. c — 1.07 ARTICLE 7.2 -CHANGE ORDERS Z A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 7.2.2: The following fees apply to Changes in the Work: a. A 10 percent maximum on overhead and profit for the direct cost of Work performed — by a Contractor or Subcontractor; b. A 5 percent maximum overhead and profit on indirect costs of a Contractor's Subcontractors; c. The total mark-up shall not exceed 20 percent and all mark-ups are subject to the Architect approval. d. On Work deleted from the Contract, credit to the Owner shall be the Architect approved net cost plus 1/2 of the overhead and profit percentage noted above. — 2. In the case of an increase or decrease in the contract sum, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data, showing adjustments on the basis of reasonable — expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. 1.08 ARTICLE 7.3 -CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Add the following subparagraph: Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 7300 - Page 1 of 3 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. 7.3.11: The following fees apply to Changes in the Work in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6: a. A 10 percent maximum on overhead and profit for the direct cost of Work performed by a Contractor or Subcontractor; b. A 5 percent maximum overhead and profit on indirect costs of a Contractor's Subcontractor; c. The total mark-up shall not exceed 20 percent and all mark-ups are subject to the Architect approval. d. On Work deleted from the Contract, credit to the Owner shall be the Architect approved net cost plus 1/2 of the overhead and profit percentage noted above. 2. In the case of an increase or decrease in the contract sum, the Contractor shall keep and _ present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data, showing adjustments on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. 1.09 ARTICLE 8 -TIME A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 8.2.4: Contract Time is identified in Section 00 3113 - Bidding and Construction Schedule. 1.10 ARTICLE 11.1 - CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Add the following Paragraph as follows: B. Insurance: C. The Contractor shall secure and maintain such insurance from an insurance company authorized to write casualty insurance in the State where the work is located as will protect himself, his subcontractors and which shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Architect and their officers, agents, and employees from and against all claims for bodily injury, death or property damage which may arise from the Contractor's operations under this contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or t' indirectly employed by the Contractor and Subcontractor. D. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under this section and shall have filed the certificate of insurance with the Owner and a copy with the Owner's attorney. Each insurance policy shall contain a clause assuring the insurance company will not cancel the insurance without thirty days written notice to the Owner, the Owner's attorney, and the Architect of intention to cancel. The amounts of such insurance shall be not less than the following, or greater if required by law: 1. Commercial General Liability(Including Premises- Operations; Independent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a. Bodily Injury and Property Damage (Name Owner as additional insured): 1) $1,000,000 Each Occurrence 2) $50,000 Damage to Rented Premises (Each Occurrence) 3) $5,000 Med Exp (Any One Person) 4) $1,000,000 Personal &Advertising Injury 5) $2,000,000 General Aggregate 6) $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate b. Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for two years after final payment. c. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C, or U coverage as applicable. d. Contractual Liability to be included. 2. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: a. Bodily Injury: 1) $1,000,000 CSL Each Person —" 2) $(included) Each Occurrence b. Property Damage: 1) $(included) Each Occurrence 3. Umbrella Excess Liability: Name Owner as additional insured: a. Excess Liability: 1) $3,000,000 Each Occurrence 2) $3,000,000 Aggregate Project No. 21-25083 Section 00 7300 - Page 2 of 3 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 4 Worker's Compensation: a. State Statutory b. Applicable Federal Statutory — 1) (e.g. Longshoremen's) c. Employer's Liability 1) $1,000,000 Each Accident_ 2) $1,000,000 Disease - EA Employee 3) $1,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit 5. Rented Equipment: a. Special/Replacement Cost subrogation. -` 1) $100,000 Rented Equipment y notice of cancellation/non-renewal - no waiver of su rog 6. Per occurrence - 30 NSURANCE � equivalent PROPERTY and maintaining a"special form' or 1.11 ARTICLE 1 ne - responsible for purchasing A. The Owner scl be respooc ucionerbiage shall be policy as described in the General Conditions oftas an"all-risk" policy. 1. The General Conditions refers to t policy replaced with "special form". B. A copy of the Genera l Conditions of the Contract for Construction can be obtained at the office of the Architect. , 1.12 ARTICLE 11 -PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 4 cr A. Add the following: are as follows: �, — a. 1. 11.1.4:The bond value requirements a. Provide bonds on a standard surety bond form. 4 percent Performance Bond. P b. Provide a 100 Payment Bond. Pay C. Provide a percent after execution of the Contract. _ d. Deliver bonds within 3 days � 1.13 ARTICLE 15.1.7 -LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Substantial Completion of the Work has not occurred on da of re tco date the bidder,then commencing on the following y, A. In the event that provided on the bid form by of the Work is established, the or fraction thereof until Substantial Completionc for trah dayrshall to the Owner, at the sole option of the Owner, the amount of Five Hundred Contractor pay Damage Amount"). per diem (" of the Work z _ and N Dollars ($500.00) the bidder,the Owner will The Contractor and the Owner agree that in the event the Substantial Completion B. prior to the date provided on the bid form by does not occur on or due to the special nature of the Project the Owner'sor 0 in an amount which may, Completion date, be impractical � suffer damagesupon the Substantial Comp tha the Damage Amount businessxe andd the Owner's reliance of the damages that the Owner will suffer in the event that Substantial extremely difficult to acertain.The Owner and the Contractor agree is a reasonable estimate Completion of the Work does not occur on or prior fo m f a Change Substantial Completion educingractor refuses e. z es shall be in th Ir red reducing C. Payment r' liquidated Sdum um b the amount of the liquidated damages. Contractor's Change Ordert or liquidated damages, the Owner reserves If the amountto of theerally reduce sign the Changethe amount of the liquidated damages. — the Contract Sum by unpaid balance of the Contract, the Contracta Owner liquidated damages by exceeds thetoftheid balance and the Contractor shall pay shall be reduced the amount the unpaid and the unpaid balance. the difference between the liquidated damages PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION — Section 00 7300 - Page 3 of 3 Project No. 21-25083 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation — SECTION 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES — PART 1 GENERAL lications for progress payments. 1 01 SECTION INCLUDES submittal of app and Contract Time. A. Procedures tfoo preparation es in Contract Sum and — B. Documentation of changes e procedures. changes. payment. C. Chang of Contractor submittals basedon D. ProCorcedures e preparation and submittal of application for final — re ar -Supplement Conditions: E. procedures for p ENTS Supp Work. REQUIREMENTS - Document 00 730 0changes in the 1.02 RELATED General Conditions and payments,final payment,— A. Section 00 7200 paym requirements for progress reement. Additional req in the A9 03 A. Use Sc eOFd VALUES AIA G703, edition stipulated 1 Values Form: information will be considered in lieu of standard A. Use Schedu le of equivalent printout including q royal. B. form sbmit draft to Architect for approval. p net-Contractor specified; after date of Ow Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.C. duplicate within 15 dayswith Submit Schedule of Values in � D. ect Manual. Identify each line item � Agreement. Identify site mobilization.rol ti Utilize the Table of Contents of this 0 cn — E. Format: of the specification section. itmamount of Contractor's overhead number and title from each line item, a direct proportional 3 arately Application For Payment. o F. Include separately with each App 0 — and profit. Change Orders, z' G. Revise schedule to list approvedPAYMENTS o APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS Completion of the �a 1.04 riot to Substantial � Monthly. e from the payment otherwise A. Payment Period: payment made p B Progress Payments: For each progress amount, as retaina9 z Work,the Owner may withhold the following Agreement. {� 5/o • elated in the Ag due: Five Percent( ) IA G703, edition stip lA G702 and Form Ant information will be considered in lieu of standar C Use Form A equivalent royal. ° printout including q. z p. Electronic fie s mit sample to Architect for approval. cc form specified; E. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.each of the following: F. For each item, provide a column for listing 1. Item Number. 2. Description of work. 3. Scheduled Values. Application. 4. Previous Applications. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this t pp 5. Application. 6. Authorized Change Total Completed and Stored to Date of pp — 7 e of Completion. 8. Percentage 9. Balance to Finish. 10. Retainage. — certification by signature of authorized officer. Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line G. Executeproducts. Use data from approved Schedule of Change Order number and H. portion of work performed and for stored rodline c s. listing _ item for n e Order as a separate I List each authorized Chang dollar amount as for an original item of work. Section 01 2000 -Page1 of 3 — Project No. 21-25083 Cit of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation y J. Submit three co K. Includepies of each q the followingApplication for P 1' Transmittal letter the Payment when 2. application: submitting paper co Constructionas specified for sub pies. 3. Project progress schedule submittals in Section — be returned documents as , revised and 01 3000. to the specified in current as specified in — L. When Architectjct recordrequiresContractor. Section 01 7800 Section for review by01 3000. question. Provide substantiating Owner numberg information, submitwhich will 1.05 one copy of data with cover letter for h co MODIFICATION application PROCEDURES and line item by each copy dollar number and pY of sub amounts in A. 00EDURES submittal. Show Submit name of the individualdescription. "' responsible for informing authorized to Contract Documents. others in Contractor's change documents and B. meors. ge For minor changesemploy or subcontractors who will be — will issue instructions not an adjustmentof chang es to C. involving to Contractor. to the Contract For other required changes, Price Contractor ges, Architect or Contract Time, 1. Theto proceed with the will issue Architect documentchange, a document signed determining will describe ge° for subsequent by Owner instructing minin the re quent inclusion in a Change 2. Promptlyg any change in Contract changes and Order. execute the change ntract Sum or will designate D. For changesContract Time. method of — for which advance a detailed description of pricing is desired specifications a changea proposed changedesired, Architect overtime in Contract Time with supplementary issue a document that includes �.-- work required and theme for executing �'or revised considered valid. Contractor shall perioddrawings and �r prepare and during which the requested stipulation vany E. - Contractor maysubmit a fixed price price will be the proposed propose a change byquotation within seven the change, and full effect o submitting a re g change the effect itsn the n the work, quest for change to a statement describingContract Sum with a statementArchitect, describing ,,- requested the effect on and Contract Time describing the reason for substitutions in work by separate or other contractors. documentation and the Contract. of Change in Contract 01 6000. Document Amount: As s any _ 1. For change requested specified in the Agreement and will be based on Contractors price for work fallingConditions of 2. For changeprice under a fixed fora requested byquotation. price contract, 3 Change Order as approved Contractor, the amount will be the amount For pre-determined by Architect. based on the the fixed unit unit prices and Contractor's re 4 For change pines. quantities, where applicable, quest determined ordered by Architect without a the amount _"'mined by Architect based on thewill based on Time and Material work. quotation from Contractor, G. Substantiation Contractors substantiationthe amount will be of Costs: Provide full information of costs as specified for 1. On request, provide the followingmation re — a. Quantities of data: required for evaluation. ab. Taxes, insurance, labor, and e insurance, and bonds. equipment. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any e. Credit for deletions from in Contract Time. 2 Cr ditea m Contract, _ claim for additional costs similarly documented. a. Origin and date of with additional information: b. Dates and times claim. C. Da Time records work was performed d. Invoices and wage rates and by whom and receipts for paid. documented. products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly Project No. 21-25083 City of Waterloo - ection 01 2000 - Page 2 of 3 Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation — Sulli 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. H. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. I. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. J. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub- - schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. K. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Q rn Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 2000 - Page 3 of 3 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals in general. E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. _ F. Number of copies of submittals. G. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds. 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATOR A. Project Coordinator: General Contractor. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices a and sheds, for employee access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. a D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution o of ambiguities and conflicts. v`. E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. 2 F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator. G. Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator: 1. Requests for Interpretation. 2. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 3. Test and inspection reports. 4. Design data. 5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 2 6. Applications for payment and change order requests. 7. Progress schedules. z 8. Coordination drawings. 9. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 10. Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED _ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. _ 3. Contractor. C. Note: The following agenda items are not intended to be the final or a complete list of the items that will be discussed. A complete agenda will be distributed at the preconstruction meeting. D. Agenda: Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 3000 - Page 1 of 4 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. — 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Owner. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.7. Scheduling. 8. Shop drawings submittal, review times, and overall process. 9. Open for comments; attendees are encouraged to bring other topics or concerns up for discussion at this time. E. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to the Contractor, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Architect will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-weekly intervals. _ B. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule.8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. — 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work. D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to the Contractor, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 7 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned — operations for the first 60 days of work, with a general outline for remainder of work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 5 days. C. Within 7 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. _ D. Within 5 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.04 SUBMITTALS IN GENERAL A. All submittals shall be submitted to the Architect through the Project Coordinator- No exceptions. B. PDFs by e-mail is the preferred method; coordinate with Architect's representative. — Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 3000 - Page 2 of 4 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Refer to"Requirements for Electronically Submitted Shop Drawings" attached to this section. _ C. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published ata. mankfeach spy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement standard data to provide information specific to this Project. D. Shop Draw Submittals: Prepared specifically Project; utility electricalal characteristics, utility connection onnecquiements, and location of utility outletsfor service for functional equipment and appliances. uct,with E. Sample Subparts and Illustrat devices. Coordinate functional and sampleic characteristics subm submittals for interfacing work. integral parts and attachment 1. For selection f standard S bl samples f the full range of the manuuers standadcolorstexture , and patterns. F. By submitting submittals, the General Contractor represents to Architect that General Contractor has: 1. Reviewed and approved them. 2. Determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so. 3. Checked d of coordinated the of information Documents.a contained withinithin such submittals with the requirements— G. Submittals that do not appear to be reviewed and approved will be returned to the General Contractor without the Architect's review. Time delays for this breach in procedure will be at the sole expense of the General Contractor. a_H. All shop drawings shall be submitted no later than 45 days after execution of the contract. a. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW 5 — A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: z 1. Product data. 6- 2. Shop drawings. 5` 3. Samples for selection. n, 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review,for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with c information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. a C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. (s D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES z article below. z — 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION d A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: — 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. — 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. Section 01 3000 - Page 3 of 4 Project No. 21-25083 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. E. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals. 3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the Contract Documents and coordinating related work. 2. Generic, non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form. 1. For shop drawing submittals use form attached to this specification section. C. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 10 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that ma be of detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. y I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties toto comply with requirements. promptly report any inability L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 3000 - Page 4 of 4 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation -- SECTION 01 3000 --ATTACHMENT SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL FORM _ Date: Architects Project No: 21-25083 Project Name: Cit of Waterloo Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Specification Section Number: Specification Section Name: — Description: Subcontractor or Supplier Approval: General Contractor or Construction Manager App Approval: d > 0 a a cn v z 0 3- ; o' N eo n cr F. Z a, 0 Other Reviews and Comments: ct 0 Architect I Engineer Review: w 0 1 z ,1 SECTION 01 3000 --ATTACHMENT — REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONICALLY SUBMITTED SHOP DRAWINGS 1. The Contractor shall fill out and include the submittal cover sheet included in the project manual. 2. The shop drawings are to be reviewed by the ContractorThe before submitting. All field required — verifications and missing information shall be completed per the Contractor shall review them and verify that the products submitted are acceptable — speci fications. The Contractor shall then affix their stamp on the submittal cover sheet. Contractor must review - No ass-throw h drawin s are ermitte . he Each 3. do The Contractor shall prepare a single PDF file so that allhe oftsubmittal PDF shall includedo in one ntain document. Only ONE specifications section per submittalpermitted. Bookm arks set to the destination of separate items contained within the file. If the Contractor elects to use their own transmittal sheet it shall be a separate attachment. the 4. Scan s shall be in color. All pages shall be oriented correctly. Actual l must bet sizes fore at those mittal . shall— be 8 1/2x11 or 11x17 whenever possible. All print and Larger file sheets such as 24x36 sheet size shall be identified in the a-mail• the project name. 5. The e-mail subject line shall list the 'descg't pfionlect number first of the submittal contentsl by the follow the submittal � d Then the section number and a brief > number. Example: 12345 - High School Addition - 23 3700-Air outlets and inlets. LL 6. The PDF file or att achment shall be named as follows. Example: 23 3700 Air outlets & inlets 12345 - High School Addition.pdf arate CD 7. Samples and color selections associated with the selectionsawings shall shallb be clude delivered to ep and the shop attachment when practical. Actual samples, colorC are received. drawings will not be reviewed until actual samplesI s he 8. The Architect/Engineer will review the drawings, make notes a requiire required on sddrach ings and 0 stamp them. The PDF file shall then be renamed by adding i — R EVIEWED, FURNISH AS CORRECTED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT or REJECTED. Example: 23 3700 Air outlets and inlets 12345 High School Addition REVIEWED.pdf shall then use the original email and attach the reviewed drawings in gs and z 9. The Architect 1 Engineera. _ Engineer shall be considered as r ir o forward back to the contractor. The e-mail that they are attached to will be cons transmittal. Any notes in the body of the email from the Architect I written on the sheets of the PDF file. 00 ct 1 Engineer. Note: Hard copies will be required to be o 10. No hard copies will be sent by the Archite 9 included in the O&M Manuals as part of the project close out submittals. o END OF ATTACHMENT SECTION 01 3510 STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 INTENT AND CONDITIONS and special inspection services. — A. Intent and inspection services. with the 1. Define and coo coordinate conventional testing Code. 2. Define andspecified work is constructed in compliancefiance contract grater confidence that the probable comp 3. documents and Chapter 17 of the 2015 assist ars determining ia _ Testing and Inspection services are intended services do not relieve the Contractor of 4. requirements specified. — of the work witho with the requirements of the contract documents. responsibility for compliance re uire the Owner's representative q Conditions required, meet. Owner,may require end B. plant, before ship I in with 1. testing inspection o tof the work at he P et ho rmect. wnel nor comp Y d th Stuct and inspectiong (SER) reserve the rig Structural Engineer of Record standard used — Testinge contractd documents. performed in accordance with the industry specified. inspection shall be p procedure unless other are sp < 2. h and specific material or p fe criteria in accordance with tests shall be accomplished o as the reference for the defective work or it In the absence of a referenced rd, generally accepted industry but failure to detect any Work shall be checked as it progresses, ection if defective work or materials are a. 3. prevent later rejection such work. _ discovered,s nor in no way obligate Owner to acceptz shall it �, scope sections regarding specific qualifications, inspections, 0 echnical 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS «. A, Refer fr PART 3andr tstandards required. u` frequency � tests, manipulation and analysis of 1.03 DEFINITIONS stems, primarily requiring physical -- A. Testing—Evaluation of systems, roved standards. inhering judgment. o primarily requiring observation and eng Inspection Services o materials, in accordance with toap Special r Evaluation of systems, p and C. Inspection— Inspection—Structural Testing Code, and her Services in B. and Special integrityof the o Structural Testing required by the 2015 International Building are critical to the items , Engineer of Record, herein include items c the professional judgment of the Structural Inspection building structure. Conventional Testing and —' and Inspection— be considered Services v herein red specially required by Code but may D. Conventional Testing describe those items not systems. and coordination of the proper performance of the building y of overall design — E. Architect of Record—The prime consultant in charge of the project. (SER)—The Licensed Engineer in responsible charge _ F. Structural Engineer of Record structural design for the project. experience in the engineer with education andproject is Engineer —A professional eng radish ind the state in which the G. Licensed Structural ro ect licensed to p design of structures similar to this p 1 testing services. located. qualified firm performing inspections. A) H. Testing Agency (r (SI)— Theproperly gsr special A properly qualified individual or firm performing ed with the I. Special Inspector — authorized representative charged Code. J. administrationd Official—The Officer or his duly inspection by an approved work requiring special insp or by a. and enforcement of the 2015 International Building rf K. Continuous—The full-time observation ofrequiring special inspection by an special inspector who is present in the area where the work is being performed. performed. L. approvedPpe specialpe inspector t intermittent istpres rat inthe area where the work is being p Page 1 of 8 inspector who is p Section 01 3510 - — Project No. 21-25083 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM E329-02- Standard of Materials Used in Construction.ification for A B. ASTMAgencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection E43-02- Standard Practice for A C. ASTM C1077_ 02- Practice for Laboratoriesg Testingertormin in ConstructionC1077- 2- Practice for Laboratoryg e Nondestructiveor Aggregates _ D. ASTM Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use C1093_g5- Practice for Evaluation. E. ASTM D3740- Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Inspection of ande Requirements for Agencies Unit Masonry. F. AISCand/ r Ins ection Constructionf Soil Rock as Used in igand Coned in the Testing Manual 14th Engineering Design Construction. G. 2015 International BuildingEdition (2010) H. See technical sections of P Code. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS 3 for specific references. ATIONS A. Testing Agency — acceptable to the Owner,The testing Architect, SER and shalls need approved independent 1• Authorized to o and as testing Aerate in the state in which the project below: agency requirements and testing methods specifiedproject is located and 2. Meeting applicable re in the technical scope 3. Testingrequirements of Section 1.04experienced with the equipment shall be "References"• sections of PART 2. traceable to either the calibrated at reasonable intervals by physical constants. National Bureau of Standards, or to accepted values of devices of accuracy B. Special Inspector(SI)—The special registered civil/structural engineer, natural inspector shall be under the direct supervision and special inspection, experienced with the type .. 1 The categories of special of work re of a `'_ inspector are: requiring structural testing a. Special Ins pector-Technical I, II, b. :11-:: Special Inspector- and III: Usually an employee of a testing special inspector re y an employee agency. �,-- related technical specification sections. for specific materials and of the 1.06 RESPONSIBILITIESSER's firm. system, are noted in A. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1 Special Inspectors: a. Sign the Structural Testing and Special Inspection Summary - b• If re parties prior to commencement of construction.le in conjunction quested, attend a testing and s pre-construction meetingnspection. to review the scope of structural approved drawings,pe assigned for conformance with the building apprved design the Code. specifications and applicable material and rkmanship provisionsdelay of work. Perform testing and inspection in a timely workmanship d. Bring discrepancies to the immediate attention manner to avoid department 4 — confirm that they are corrected and, if uncorrected taftere oa reasonable for eorrection, bring c the attention of the Structural Engineer of Record the the to ttect. nadin period of atind e. — Submit test and/or inspection re Building Official, and to Structural and/or of Record, ports to the Building Structural Engineerand other designated persons in accordanceco the f. Testing and Special Inspection Summarypersons with the Submit a final signed report stating _ Schedule.was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with whether the work requiring special inspection plans, specifications and the a 2 Testing Agency: applicable workmanshipthe approved a. Sign the Structural Testing provisions of the Code. with other responsible parties prior to commencement Inspectional Summary Schedule in conjunction comencem nt of constr uction. Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 3510 - Page 2 of 8 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation — b. If requested, attend a pre-construction meeting to review the scope of structural testing and special inspection. c. When engaged as a special inspector, provide structural testing and special inspection services as previously described. 3. Architect of Record (or other prime consultant): a. Complete and sign the Structural Testing and Special Inspection Summary Schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to commencement of construction. Provide a completed copy of the schedule to all signed parties including Building Official. — b. If appropriate, arrange and attend a pre-construction meeting to review the scope of structural testing and special inspection. Include Contractor, Building Official, SER, Testing Agency and other parties concerned. c. Coordinate the flow of reports and related information to expedite resolution of construction issues. 4. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): a. Identify items requiring structural testing and special inspection including special cases. ---i b. Define "type" of special inspector required for"description" of work indicated on the structural testing and special inspection schedule. c. Complete and sign the Structural Testing and Special Inspection Summary Schedule prior to commencement of construction. d. If requested, attend a pre-construction meeting to review the scope of structural testing and special inspection. — e. Review reports submitted by special inspectors. f. If engaged as a special inspector, provide structural testing and special inspection services as previously described. 5. Contractor: a. Sign the Structural Testing and Special Inspection Summary Schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to commencement of construction. b. Coordinate efforts to gain signatures of all signing parties other than the Architect and — Structural Engineer of Record (SER). c. If requested, attend a pre-construction meeting to review the scope of structural ,}, testing and special inspection. d. Post or make available the Structural Testing and Special Inspection Summary Schedule within its office at the job site. Also, provide adequate notification to those parties designated on the schedule so they may properly prepare for and schedule their work. — e. Provide the special inspectors access to the approved drawings and specifications at p,. the job site. f. Review reports submitted by special inspectors. w g. Retain at the job site all reports submitted by the special inspectors for review by the 4 `— building official upon request. h. Correct in a timely manner, deficiencies identified in inspection and/or testing reports. i. Provide the special inspector safe access to the work requiring inspection and/or — testing. j. Provide labor and facilities to provide access to the work and to obtain, handle and deliver samples, to facilitate testing and inspection and for storage and curing of test samples. k. Verification of conformance of the work within specified construction tolerances is solely the Contractor's responsibility. 6. Fabricator: — a. Sign the Structural Testing and Special Inspection Summary Schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to commencing construction. b. Submit a Certificate of Compliance to the Building Official, Special Inspector, and Structural Engineer of Record that the work was performed in accordance with the approved plans and specifications. 7. Building Official (Typical responsibilities noted for information only): a. Determine work, which in the Building Officials opinion, involves unusual hazards or — conditions in accordance with the 2015 International Building Code. Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 3510 - Page 3 of 8 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation b. Review special inspector qualifications. _ c. Accept and sign the completed Structural Testing and Special Inspection Summary Schedule. d. Review all fabricators who perform work in their shop, which requires special inspection. e. Review reports and recommendations submitted by the special inspectors. f. Review the "final signed reports" submitted by the special inspector(s). These documents should be accepted and approved by the building department prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 8. Owner: a. Establish direct funding to provide for cost of structural testing and special inspection services. b. Provide special inspector with approved design drawings, specifications and approved shop drawings. c. Provide special inspectors and testing agencies with full access to site at all times. d. Sign the Structural Testing and Special Inspection Summary Schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to commencement of construction. B. Conventional Testing and Inspection 1. Testing Agency: a. Test or inspect the work assigned, for conformance with building department approved plans, specifications and applicable workmanship provisions of the 2015 International Building Code. b. Bring non-conforming items to the immediate attention of the Contractor, and if uncorrected to the Architect of Record. c. Submit test and/or inspection reports to the Architect of Record, the Contractor and other designated persons. — 2. Contractor: a. Provide adequate notification to testing agency so they may properly prepare for and schedule their work. b. Provide testing agency with access to the approved design drawings, approved shop drawings and specifications at the job site. c. Correct in a timely manner, deficiencies identified in test and/or inspection reports. d. Provide testing agency with safe access to the work requiring testing and inspection. ;>e. Provide labor and facilities to provide access to the work and to obtain and handle samples, to facilitate testing and inspection and for storage and curing of test samples. f. Verification of conformance of the work within specified construction tolerances is solely the Contractor's responsibility. 3. Architect of Record (or other prime consultant): a. Coordinate the flow of reporting and related information to expedite resolution of construction issues. C. Inspections by Building Official 1. Contractor shall provide adequate notice for inspections performed by the Building Official,as required by the 2015 International Building Code, and local ordinance. D. Periodic Site Observations by Design Consultant 1. Special structural testing and inspection, conventional testing and inspection, and periodic inspections by the Building Official do not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations by Architect or Structural Engineer of Record, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications. E. Limits of Authority 1. Testing agents and/or special inspectors may not waive or alter contract requirements, or approve or accept any portion of the work unless specifically authorized by the Architect or Structural Engineer of Record. They may not assume any duties of the Contractor, and they have no authority to stop or reject"Work". Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 3510 - Page 4 of 8 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1.07 PAYMENT employ and pay for services of the special inspectors to perform required A. Owner shall directly Inspection. to perform required — Structural Testing and Specialagency to and pay for services of the testing 9samples, mock- ups,Owner shall employ and Inspection. a for all materials, samp Conventional Testing provide and pay a for all shipping costs the Contractor shall p and shall pay C. Unless noted otherwise,required for testing and inspectionin costs of samples Testing agency will pay for shipping ups, and assemblies related to delivery of this work. _ transported from site to lab. the cost of such work shall be transp of the f exploratory work is required to determine the cause of defects,D. I p shallt be all reimburse the Owner for all costs incurred the orkevent. paid bythe Contractor, if the work is found to be defective, in the judgment se _ Architect/Engineer. ny t tests required it e to qualify th sts required to qualify the CoheraOcv°neor, the workmen for any phase E. performed at no additional cost to t testing or inspection. r. placed 1.08 INSPECTION NOTICE to or during placement shall not be Contractor shall provide minimum of 24 hours notice for all items requiringand inspection A. testing and inspection services prior testing Items requiring and inspection services a and inspection services are available. Items requiring � until testing a after placement shall not be enclosed or obscured until testing services— � are performed. ,�, 1.09 REPORTS shall submit rep orts in accordance withrt the Structural and — and/or special inspectors A. Testing agency Inspection Summary Schedule and shall c mensnand observations comply with Testing andand Special (1)test specimens e and c comply of report whether; record types Contract s a ud state in eachpe epcally state any deviations, (2) F and performed,to correct deficiencies. Centcact Documents, and specifically 3 record work required defects found in work, ( ) inspection, shall be submitted in timely manner tote �, Reports for structural testing and special B. Official, SER, and Architect of Record. Contractor, Building to provide the information noted below: 0 ' 1. Submit reports for ongoing work, a. Date issued. — b. Project title and number. z c. Firm name and address.of tester or inspector. i d. Name and signature lin e. Date and time of sampling. f. Date of test or inspection.duct and specification section. Identification of p elevations, grid location and detail. g. including h. Location in project,ections. interpretation of same• — i Type of test or inspections. and j. Results ti tests or inspections with Contract Documents or deviations there k. Observations regarding special inspection was,to from. whether the work requiring plans, report stating 2 Submit a final signedinspector's knowledge, in conformance with the approved the best of the provisions of the code. manner to the applicable workmanship specifications and the app and inspection shall be submitted in a timely C. Reports for conventional testing — Contractor and the Architect ANDfINSPECTION 1.10 FREQUENCY OF TESTING _ A. For detailed requirements see technical sections of PART 3. Section 01 3510 -Page 5 of 8 Project No. 21-25083 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1.11 PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of testis work and substrates and to eliminate deficiencies, visual g, or inspection, the Contractor shall repair ed qualities restoreo substexporates surfaces, encies, including de in th Protect work exposed byas judged solelyby deficiencies in the or for testing the Ar o Architect/Engineer repaired ederr . Repairerd. _ and protection is the Contractor's and/or inspection and protect re for testing and/or inspection. responsibility, regardless of the assignment work. 1.12 TESTS TO p DEMONSTRATE g mast of responsibility A. If the Contractor proposes QUALIFICATION p poses a product material, qualified, the Architectprp may re qualified. These tests willa be quire applicablemethod,d sr otherblissystem that has pnot been ontra, to establish a basis for acceptance or rejectB. The Architect/Engineer of paid for by the Contractor. pre- — the system Record reserves the right to certificate shall be signed ns in compliance with anyrequire or standardsficatds calledor other PART 2 gby a representative of an independentcrited agency. forpr.proof hehat MATERIALS (NOT USED) PART 3 SCOPE OF TESTING testing 3.01 STRUCTURALAND INSPECTION TESTING AND SPE — CIAL INSPECTION PROGRAM parties involved shall complete and sign the SUMMARY Summary Schedule.n g Structural buildingdThe Program, including SummaryTesting and Special official for Schedule, shall be submitted Inspection e includes the official approvalg prior to issuance of a building permit. The competed schedule 2. The associated technical scope requiring judge conformance with the approvedinspection and testing. pe sections that define the applicable International Bence plans ands bonsina standards or basis of inspection and test The technical scopepotions tions in accordance by which to _ 3. The frequency sections should also include the hdegree of re g; r e , intermittent/will call or full time/continuous. 4 The parties responsible i.e., weekly, 5 possible for monthly, per test/ins The required sponsi acknowledgments performing the inspection and testinction, per floor, etc. 3.02 CONVENTIONAL TESTINGgments by each designated testing work. AND INSPECTION party. A. (Not Used) ECTION 3.03 STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION STATEMENT INSPECTIONS A. Refer to attached Program OF SPECIAL SpecialrInspection services Summar y Schedule for this project. It includes a schedule of - forInsconductingapplicable to this project and the identity these inspections and tests. B. The Special Inspector shall keep of agencies to be retained to the Official, the records of all inspections and shall furnish inspection to brought t Building the immediate Architect and Structural Engineer of Record. �' not corrected, the discrepancies attention of the reports Contractor for correction. Discrepancies shall be ° Architect and SER. shall be brought to the attention of the Buildingre her responsibilities. The Special Inspection pancies are , the program does not relieve the Contractor coflhis or C. Interim reports shall be sub D. A Final Re submitted to the Building Official, Report of Special Inspections documentingArchitect, and SER. Inspections, testing and correction of any completion of all re Inspections, prior issuance d of nte Use Amine S 3.04 TECHNICAL SECTIONSof discrepancies noted in the inspections and Occupancy. pections shall be A Section 31 2200 _ Earthwork - _ 1. (Not Used) Gradin Excavation Fillin 2. Definitions a. Refer to PART 1 for standard definitions. b. Special Inspector— Technical ' Project No. 21-25083 _ Section 01 3510- Page 6 of 8 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation envision of a Technical III. eotechnicapervision of a Tech Technician shall be ualifd�ied er 9 e direct supervision or a graduate — — 1) Technical I: performed in a q of 2 years experience, Work shall be p minimum erigeotor a graduate 2) Technical and: is anniem with ea m ualified and approved engineer, is employee of a q envision of a Technical III.a ed in this type of ting under the direct supervision regularly engaged laboratory, licensed in the State in which the 3) of 4 years experience, approved Technical III: A civillgeotechnical engineerqualified and work with a minimum of a q ineer shall review and project is located, and is ans employee Tis licensed engineer laboratory Frequency and geotechnicalltesting ld reports. (Item and Freq approve alln final ecial In pection Requirements — 3 Structural Testing and Sp construction per Qualifications) Analysis, :D2487. Technical I needed (Proctor, Sieve Classification of materials used and encountered during a. 488 and ASTM ASTormatesting of materials,echn cal I b. Performance it laboratory o liation Test, etc.). Atterberg Limits, work for general Field Density Tests: Technical I Technical I c' periodicwih results t field compaction and laboratory Reports.d. Provide sand slabs and verify design with Contract Documents and Geotechnical compliance radeslexcavaTechnical bases Ibelow footing � e. Observe all subgTechnical I bearing capacity is achieved. compliance with Contract presence of groundwater within excavations. � f. Documente p subgrade observations for general g. Provide repots of Technical II Technical III slopes as specified in the contract documents. : Documents and Geotechnical Repo — h. Verify cut and fill Inspections Requirements requirements and shall and footings comply with frost depthc 4. Conventional Testingmanner. a. Contractorony shall a lances to the verify that SER in a timely report any � ` Cast-in-Place Concrete o B. Section 03 3000 - Thus, Special inspections as outlined 1 General is required for all concrete. ht that are fully P. a. beuw ar noting required for the following items: 4_ s three stories or less in heig below are not s of building supported 1) Isolated spread footing ht that are fully � supported on earth or rock. support walls of light frame construction,ural z s of buildings three stories or less in heig 2) onie rhting where the footings supp or the footing c> earth or rock, s are designed in accordance with Table 1808.8, grade when cc footinggreater than 2500 psi. design is based slabs a f'c rae, including prestressed slabs on inch. c 3) Noecsve sl on g perz effective prestress in concrete is less than 150 pounds 4) Concrete foundation walls constructed in accordance with Table 1807.1. 2. Definitions 1 for standard definitions. by a a. Refer to PART Technical inspector. Inspector shall be employed b Special Inspector— er n of Technical III. 10 ed by a 1) Technical lab: forCI Certified h r direct supervision of a Tech shall be employed Technicalg laboratory, Technical be 2) envision of a engaged in this type of work, b II: to Certified hGrade ict supervision a Tec testingch laboratory, regularly withhai III:minimumA c 4stearsuengineerqualified and approved testing III. eexperience and licensed in the State in which the 3) of4yto eeofa — a all repots engineer shall review and approved project is located and is an employee laboratory. The licensed ve C.C.R.L. certification at the National Bureau of _ 4 Testing laboratory shall h Standards. Structural or other personnel acceptable to Special Inspector— engineer, systems of this type c. n of structural 1) Structural I: Graduate the design envision of a Structural II. the SER, nsh experienceerformed under the direct sup Inspections shall be p Section 01 3510 - Project No. 21-25083 Page 7 of 8 Cit of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Y 2) Structural II: Civil/structural en structural systems Civil/structural of this type,engineer regularly u The licensedin theh ) engaged inthe engineerl shall licensed e State indesign of 3. Structural locaSpecial Inspector- which the i 3) Structural may and approve all ins project is Qualifications)Testing and Special Inspection be an employee of the Faction reports. Requirements (Item SER. a. Sample and test all cast in and Frequency and Prepare compression testspecimens concrete; Technical I. cylinders of concreteo fore eac (ASTM C31),for laboratory-cured compressivestrength e set of four store _ exce t rY-cured s ecime s test,h mold and cylinders P where an alternate size specimens. Specimens shall be 4x8 2) except compressivehas been approved bycylinders each days pour between strength tests (ASTM the structural en cubic and 25 C39). One set of four cylinders for yards, one set of four cylinders for each If a day's One s c Yards. pour exceeds 25 fraction thereof d nscsfor later testingdadditional 50 cubic at seven days, two at 28 days, Yards, or — specimen retained andd testreserve anrPand one priorconcrete,to make additional cylindr at three days For poet fstrength tensioned for a stressing. (When frequency of testingdays to verify testsrandomly given class of concrete, will fiveeide less than five from selected batches. conduct at least test from e etcba If fewer than five strength conducttests from 3) Slump (ASTMbatches are used, _ C 143): One test ato one test specimens; additional tests when concrete consistency changed discharge for ach ppt of compression 4) Air entrainment appears to havesion one additional test for eachC231): of compression — Test the first batch of 5) Concrete Temperature: air entrained concrete and is 40F Test concrete temperature test specimens. and below and when 8pF perature hourly _ test specimens is made, and above, when air rem On a periodic basis, and each time a set of perature 1) Verifyperform concrete mix verification; T compression mixer truck trip ticket conforms to 2) Verify that total water added to ethnical I. concrete approved mix design. ,._)--- b. mix design. mix on site does not exceed that allowed by 3) Verify that concrete and relevant time timit ality is indicative of adequatec. mixing time, 1) Verif , inspect preparation consistency _ y the following; Structural I: and placement of all concrete. (a) Verify acceptable (b) Verifygeneral condition of concrete base concrete has been sampled for re prior to placement. contamination. Vance and de quires concrete tests. (d) Verifypositing avoids segregation and (e) Verify that concrete is proper) reinforcement remainsy Consolidoted. (f) Unless noted, at proper location. inspections d. be performed on a shall be on a continuous On a periodic basis, periodic basis for the followingbasis. Ins inspections as outlined serve protectionInspections may — and curing methods for types all concrk: rete requiring 1) Verify specified curingabove; Structural I: 2) Verify specified procedures are followed. d. e. hot and cold weather On a continuous basis, inspectprocedures concrete placement; all bolts installed in concrete are °)lowed 1) Verify Structural I: fi'specified size, prior to and during 2) Verify proper concret type, spacing, configuration, consolidation around placement and shave embedment, and 4. Conventional Testingall bolts. means been taken to quantity. a. (Not Used) and Inspection Requirements achieve END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 City°f WaterlooSection 01 3510 - Page 8 of 8 - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation — Structural Testing and $pecial Inspection Program Summary Schedule Project No. 21-25083 (1) Plaza Renovation Permit No.of Waterloo Five Sullivan P Assigned Project Name: City Specific Report Firm (6) 1111 Type of Frequency (5) Waterloo, Iowa Freq Location: Inspector (4) IBC Table 1705'6 tion (3) TA IBC Table 1705.3 10001111110 Description TA ,705.. Article Soils Per IBC — Section 1705.6 Concrete TA Per IBC 1705.4 31 2200 2000 1705.3 Cast-In-Place TA 11 per IBC 1705.4 03 3000 Mason TA 1705.4 Mason -Level B per IBC 1 1 sim 04 1200000 1705.4 _Level lt per IBC 17052.1 04 Mason nth Bolts 1705.1.1 04 2000 1705.4 Hi�h_Stren Per IBC wommolIlli 1705.2.1 W tern & 1705.15 05 1705.2.1 05 1200 EIFS�Water Resistive per IBC 1705.13 07 2400 1705.1.1 Barney Coa TA ection Program.Spray Applied Fire- per Testll 70 ection Prog FireTA and Insp ,705.13 Resistive MaterialTesting" ) ' 07 8100 Steel Fabrication Special Structural Testing & included in a Sp, Structural Inspection 1704.2.5 filled out and "Guidelines for Sp z 05 1200 program will be Note: This schedule shall assumed (If not otherwise specified, Official the Building ram• No.to be provided by section in the program. -�s (2 permit specific technical scopeStructural (SIS) c� per IBC Chapter 17. Inspector- 1 3510 of spec book. (2) Referenced to the SIT), Special Insp per section 0 Use descriptions etc. ((5 ector-Technical ( per floor, Special Inspector per testli0 perform o (4) monthly, services. � Weekly, ENTS z. (5) Name of Firm contracted toACKNOWLEDGEMENTSsign below) (6) ACKNu) (Each appropriate representative shall Date: c� c� Firm: Date: , z Owner: Firm: Date: Contractor: Firm: T Date'. -- Architect: Firm: Date: SER: Firm: Date: SI-T: Firm: Date: SI-S: Firm: Date' TA: Firm: special inspectors F: official, the individual names of all prospective requested— or by engineer/architectobserve record id building TA=Testing Agency If to shall be identified as an attachment. — and the work they intendTechnical ineer of Record SI-T = Special Inspector- Structural Eng Structural FFabricator Legend: SER= ector SI S = Special Insp Date Accepted for the Building Department By SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS — PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES services A Submittals. agencies and B. Testing and inspection a9 C Control of installation. D. Tolerances. Manufacturers field services. aired by public E. ent. approvals required Defect Assessment. Inspections and RELATED REQUIREMENTS General Conditions Submittal al a product quality. Gen ittal procedures.nd p duct — 1.02 RELADocument 00 7200 ents'. A uirem for mate authorities. Requirements Administrative Re ents'. 01 3000 e uirem Section act R q ° — B� 000 -Prod � Section 01 6 ittal procedures �, C CE STANDARDS for submittal =� REF EREN Requirements, purpose c� 1.03 SUBMIT _ Administrative sections. for the limited SUBMITTALS inistrative 0 1 p4 01 3000specification administrator expressed In the o See Sectional sp s contract a concept exp A in individual knowledge a the design General: As indicated at iven and cr Gene it for Architect's anon 9 copies of report to Architect and — B n pata: Subm inform anon. C Design compliance with inform it two ` assessing comp or for Owner'spromptly submit of asse documents, ection P contract each testlinsP Test Reports. After �; D. to Contractor. 1. Include: z Date issued. number. a' Project title and 0 b Proj ection. Name of inspector.of sampling or inspection. section.c' and time ct and specifications d. pate rode 5 Cr Identification ocatiicatin the Project. — e• tion in f. Location inspection Type of testl s ection. cr- g pate of testlin p ection. of results — h• of testlinsp pocuments. retation dministrator for the LI- Results with Contract provide interp contract a the design COnCept �. Compliance Architect,p wledge interpretation given and j. Comp requested by kno co t information. z When for Architect's compliance with informationinform k report submittals areit Certification by the purpose of ass documents, or for Owner's submit quantities 2 Test rep easing comp ner s Architect,in q — the contract cu Sections, limited purp do l specification subcontractor it A Submit expressed 1n individual p lication et,i exp When specified in uirem Contractor or installatlonlapP exceeds specified requirements. E. Certificates. C with or ex s as appropriate. but must it manufacturer and Data. complies product,specified for P product vets, and certification affidavits, test results on material or i printed Indicate material or e data, submit 1• supporting reference previous sections, supp may be recent or p specification and finishing,fort e 2 Certificates Architect. in individual sp adjusting, special e table to A When specified start-up, wiring acceptable installatipon, conditions requiring Instructions assembly, application or installation' — F. Manufacturer's information. y, storage special procedures, rocedur aired for apP instructions ford Indicate sp information. environmental criteria required Page 1 of 4 Owners special en 4000 - — attention, and sp Section 01 — O. 21-25083 Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Project of Waterloo City G. Manufacturer's Field for Owner.ner. Reports: S Submit reportSubmit reports f 2 Submit for nfor duplicate within for Architect's benefit give information 30days of as H. Erection nand the design for the limited observation contract administrator or Owner. n Drawings: Submitconcept expressed purpose of assessing ssess) to Architect for information. 1 given oDr for information ti drawings for Architect's be documents.) nce with information n ormt contractSubmit 2. Data indicating °n for the nefit asion the design ConCe limited par contract or e es concept express pose of assessing administrator or for 1.05 REFERENCES Owner. inappropriate or unacceptable d in the contract Ong compliance A. For productsND STANDARDS ptable Work may documents.subject with information included and blect to action b requirements the Project workmanship specified Y Architect hite required b nts of the standard, also referred reference to B. Complyy applicable c and except when ed to as reference document or do where with reference standard es. n more rigid requirements comply not C. specific date ndard of nts are mply with Obtain co is established date of issue specified or are e. D. pies of standards d by applicable Maintain co where required e able cod on date of Contract Document E. Substantial Stiai Com ►etion project site during submittals,by product specification s, except fromspecified refer s, planning, and n sections. F. Architect before reference standards progress of the specific Neither proceeding conflict with Co tclr work, until otherwise .Architect shall be altered duties, or re Documents, request 1'Os TESTINGAND INSPECTION any refer d from responsibilities of clarification ofe reference document. the Contract A. ►NSPECTIpN ent Documents the parties in Owner wil►em AGENCIES AND by mention or inference nor specified testing)and pay for SERVICES nference inspection. 3 Where indicated; pection, of an independent testing agencyEmployment specification to Yment of pendent testis n sections the perform other accordance with requirements in no way 9 agency to Contractor shall 7 C. Contractor Em quireme Y relieves Contractor perform s all empl1. oy of Contract actor of specified testis mpioy and pay 1. Testing agency: obligation to 9 and :.,., AST 9 cyd Agency: Documents. perform inspection. 2. M C 1021, ASTM with re Work in 3. Inspection a M C1077 requirements of LL Lab agency: ASTM C1pg3 ASTM E32g 4 oratory; Authorized to Comply with AST Laboratory requirements ASTM D374 p. M E543 AST �'5. Testis ry Staff: Maim operate ' AST M E699 9 Equipment.Maintain a full time the State in which established Calibrated registered h the and ASTM E329. assurance Measure ated at reasonableed En °lect is PART 2 PRODUCTS program. meat Assurance intervals on St to located. Engineer PART 3 EXECUTION .NOT USED Program,Unde Is either by NISTevie�y services. a 3 0 CONTROL ED a laboratory measurem or ent NISI 1 CO quality A. Monitor OF INSTALLATION workmanship, control over B. hip, to prod suppliers Comply with ' manufacturers, C. Should manufacturers' an manufacture w instructions, qualit . products, service manufacturers' Architect before ufaanufas tions, including s, site instructions g each conditions and �nstr din proceeding ns conflict with Contract step in sequence, Documents, request clarification from ' City of waterloo-Sullivan Section 01 4p00-Page 2 of 4 an Brothers Plaza Renovation 1 where more stringent quality for the work exceptmore precise s minimum q . standards or tolerances,with odes,ford standards requi requirements indicate higherquality. D. codes, or specified specified q tolerances, produce required and p workmaork p persons qualified to p drawings or e instructed by the — performed by on shop E. Have work p F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated devices designed and sized to withstand _ manufacturer. place with positive anchorage Secure products in and disfigurement. ork. G. vibration, physical distortion, produce acceptable W stresses, products to 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control ofrers' tolerances conflict with Do not permit tolerances ctu to accumulate. Should manufac u s Architect before proceeding. products in place. B. Complyra t with manufacturers'request clar cation from Architect before securing Contract Documents,appropriate dimensions; position C. Adjust products to app inspection required. — INSPECTION and insp .� TESTING AND 3.03 ecification sections for testing A. See individual sp Contractor. ontractor in � Testing Agency Duties: — B. Cooperate with Architect and Test Provide qualified ie mixes site. Y , 1ualified p ,„, 2. Provide q roducts in accordance withspecifiedo performance of services and testing of products Perform specified sampling requirements of Contract Documents. of 0 4. 3. mixes with c� standards. ed irregularities or of materials and 4. Ascertain compliance � Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed Architect. o`{ 5. products. inspections required byu. Work or pspecified.Perform additional tests and tions sp z t 7 reports of all tests/inspections Submit rep Agency Authority: eon requirements of Contract b C. Limits on Testingllnspection e, evoke, alter, or enlarge 1 Agency may not release, Work. s Documemay not approve or accept t any portion of the W z 2 Agency anyduties of Contractor. J' Agency may not assume the Work. 4 has no authority to stop ro osed to be o 4 Agency samples of materials p p Hated location, adequate Contractor Responsibilities: D. ency at designated with proposed designs• Work and to 1 used that require testing, along mixaesign . the used personnel, and provide 2. Cooperate with laboratory p manufacturers' facilities.— 3 Pr ovo incidental labor d facilities: a. To roidccess to Work to be testedlinsp ected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be — tested/inspected. requiring tests/inspections. samples. operations c. To facilitate testslie and curing of test samp time for d To provide andstor la24 hours prior to expected laboratory and pay for additional 4 Notify Architect and laboratory specified requirements. testing/inspectionc services.independent qualified testing and inspections 5 Employ services of an ons required by Contractor beyond tests, and samples,tests, and inspections pay for additional samples,agency requirements. performed 6. Arrange withb OwConner's ag specified requirements shall be p requiredstigr ui ed becausecator beyondnon-compliance with specified comp for by required of non- Architect. requirements shall be paid E. Re-testing q on instructions by non-compliance with specified by the same agency required because of non-comp Section 01 4000 -Page 3 of 4 F. Re-testing q — Contractor. Project No. 21-25083 Cityof Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3.04 MANUFACTURERS'FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, re and installation, qualified staff quire material or necessary. qualitypersonnel to observe product suppliers of workmanship rye site ruction or B. Report observations pas applicable, andconditions, conditions of rvations and site to initiate instructions _ supplemental or decisions or instructions when 3 05 DEFECTcontrary to manufacturers' ASSESSMENT written instrgiiven to applicators A. Replace Work or or installers that are B. If, in the° Portions of the Work direct an pinion of Architect, it is not not complying with s appropriate remedy practical to re specified requirements. y or adjust payment. move and replace the work, Architect will END OF SECTION Wasp c tow o crj ` f 2° O o Co 2 0 0 0 2 Project No. 21-25083 City of Waterloo - Section 01 4000- Page 4 of 4 Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation _ SECTION 01 5000 CONTROLS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND — PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary sanitary facilities. — B. Temporary Controls: Barriers and enclosures. C. Waste removal facilities and services. and ventilation required for construction TEMPORARY UTILITIESheating and cooling, — 1.02 for all lighting, The Owner A. Provide and pay required to complete the work. purposes. heating shelters Provide and pay for all temporary related to weather. B. not consider any requests for extra charges will light level of 5fnot-candles for a safe work environment C. Provide Oand the protect ntain a minimum �9 construction. _ throughout receptacles may be utilized during construction prior to substantial e and worn receptacles used during a D. Permanent convenience recep › 1. Replace all damage a completion. to avoid waste of water. erated nozzles for water hoses, d — E. Use trigger-op ro project mobilization. � FACILITIES provide at time of p J 1 03 TEMPORARY SANITARY z wired facilities and enclosures. q Provide and maintain required condition. finally found. a Maintain daily in clean and sanitary B. return facilities to same or better condition as on C. At end of construction, access to protect ` to construction areas, preventto �, 1.04 BARRIERSunauthorizedoperations and barrierso to prevent workershe pu public,to allow for Co Struction of site and to p z A. Provide damage from adjacent properties from that could be hazardous to structures from damage — existing facilities and stored materials, site, and demolition. e for other vehicles not owned byte B. "non-owned" refers to insurance coverage Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, — 1 The term named insureds. Owner occupied areas,to (76 CLOSURES separate work areas from and to prevent damage to 1.05 INTERIOR EN to ied areas, o Provide temporary partitions as required _ A. articulates in HVAC prevent m. penetration of dust men°isture into Owne si!n of dust and other p Prevent deposition existing materials and equipment. 1. Dust and Airborne Particulates: lated under this Contract. protect ducts and ducts and equipment. a. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemp required due to failure to — b. Contractor shall bonst uction cost dustcleaning eanl�equipment prior to start of alterations.tems for the equipment fromducts an shut down HVAC systems c. or dirty work must be conducted, systems. Establish condition of existing completely before restarting oints and d If extremely dovty y duration; remove dust and dirtOci e by inforced p y lone sheet materials with closed 1 — Framing and re swrfaces: B. Construction: sealed edges at intersections with existing — 1.06 SECURITY A. Provide security protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, Oeft and facilities to p vandalism, rotocols. — B. Standard Covid related p — Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 5000 -Page 1 of 2 Cit of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Y 1.07 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING and acly with cess foegulations relatingg to use of streets and sidewalks, B. Coordinate emergency vehicles. access to emergency access and haul routes facilities, C. Provide and with maintain access to fire hydrants, authorities D. Provide means of re Ydrants, freeand Owner. E. moving mud fromofs before entering e -- Provide temporary vehicle wheels before not vide to p nary parking areas to accommodate construction streets. 1.08 WASTE REMOVAL additional off- site parking. personnel. A. Regulatory Re When site space is Requirements: Contractor is responsible requirements,, including but not limitedc tos legal disposal of for knowing B. allu i gstrucnon Federal, state and complyingent , Instruction: and demolitionand local requirements with regulatory salvage, Provide on-site instruction waste materials. Pertaining to 9e, reuse, and return methods to be appropriate separation,paration C. Provide used by allhandling, and waste removalparties at the appropriate stages "! orderly facilities and services of the condition. as required D. to maintain the site in clean and E. If materialser to with lids. Remove trash from non-combustible recycled or re-usedm site periodically. mbssoble containers;l on the unless otherwise locate containers rholdin ect must be stored 1 09 FIELD rwise approved by the authorities havingon-site, OFFICESg flammable material outside the stable jurisdiction. structure A. Office: Weatherti with sturdyght, with lighting, electrical furniture, drawingoutlets,B. Provides rackand drawingheating,tble cooling equipment, and e REMOVAL OF UTILITIES meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate equipped A. Remove tom ' FACILITIES, AND O1nmodate 6 Completion inspection. utilities, CONTROLSpersons. paryion. equipment, facilities, materials, B. Remove under prior to Date of C ground installations to Substantial Clean and repair damage a minimum depth of 2 feet. D. Restore caused by installation or Grade site as indicated. existing facilities used use of temporary E. Restore existing during construction to original oo condition. work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - site damaged by construction dition. PARTNOT USED to original condition. 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 City of Waterloo- Section 01 5000- Pa Sullivan Brothers Plaza Page 2 of 2 Renovation — SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS — PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES roduct requirements. P. General p B. Transportation,handling,products. Re-use of existing P storage and protection. C.D. Product option requirements. design intent. E. Base specifiedlscheduled products and F. Inconsistencies.— G. Substitutions in general. and software. I-I. Substitution limitations. lied products. spare parts,tools, caner-supP extra materials, P , I. Procedures for Owner-supplied including — Maintenance materials, � J REQUIREMENTS ents: Submittals. e uirem lambing RELATED Administrative Requirements: q quality monitoring. d 1.02 01 3000 - Adm ents: product q Equipment: Motors for P A Section Quality Requirements: is for Plumbing p1 4000 - Motor Requirements . B. Section Common Section 22 0513 - Having �' C. do ted by Authority 0 equ�Prnent. DS CE STANDARDS Most Recent Edition Adopted s tp REFERENCE Amendments and Supplements. 1 03National Electrical Code M endm o NFPA 70 - All Applicable Am z A. Including `�, Jurisdiction, specifically z PRODUCTS ises unless sP PART 2 PRODUCTS oved from existing prem ODU equipment rem relocated, 5 2 01 EXISTING PR a uip Documents. ere-used, of the Do not use materials and q removed,but not to b property u) A. permitted by Contract Docum to remain the required °r P equipment indicated to be iated as 0 v materials and q or otherwise remove from site. o Existing delivered to the Owner' 0 B. property of the Contractor; u. reinstalled, the prop Documents.owner,become Contract Docum PRODUCTS uired or permitted by free. NEW PROD specifically req and materials are asbestos — 2 02 products unless the equipment required to provide letters of Owner A provide new Owner that all new lins are and material suppliers prior to material installations. The B. The Contractor shall anon subcontractors, documentation pmaterials shall be Contractor, supporting time including prior to an the after installation. z The C with P If asbestos confirmation materials are tested androved the mat rials shall found to contain asbestos,select materials to a test for asbestos at any an Owner approved nt and may regulations bymaterials. If a suspect asbestos m all new asbestos free products shoe be for any and y monitoring, abated in accordance with asbestosbest reg n, on site m aterial. The Contractor shall be p Contractor. Owner will collect — abatement contractor. New materials,such rn the cost for asbestos design,supplyingresponsibility of the samples. suspect asbestos same permitted: replacement shall be the resp asbestos is and dreg the of random — abatement, any characteristics is not and pay for the testing products having any of the following C,s products that C. Use of P or containing CFC s or HCF reference top Made usinggive p — _ 1. met, Contractor shall closer to the location of the project. D. harvested, and/or manufactured Where other criteria are span under normal use. 1 Are extracted,documented life 2 Have longer 3 Result in less construction waste. 1 of 4 Section 01 6000 -Page Project No. 21-25083 it of Waterloo-Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation Cy E. Wiring Terminations: and materials indicated. e ter 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS d. Size minal lugs to match branch terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lug conductorSpecified those standards by Reference lugs for terminal sizes box. Pro arils or description Standards or b B. ducts Specified Y Descri manuf:turs re by Naming Description Only: Use named One or More Manufacturers: Use any product meeting C. S and meeting _ Specified byg specifications, no Submit a re Naming One options a product of one D. quest for substitution or More Manufacturers or substitutions of the Products that rdoequest n for any manufacturer with allowed. E. Cost not meet project s not name Provision for Substitutions: — associated with mspecifications mayd. be at sole ex replacement be ns: 2.04 MAINTENANCE expense of Contractor. product and rejected at an ANCE MATERIALS delay in any time during the project. Furnish extra Stra materials, spare due to rejection Jection shall B. specification section pads' tools, and Deliver to Project site software of typesEXECUTIONreceipt and in quantities 3.01 BASE prior to specified final payment. in SPECIFIED/SCHEDULED A. Certain specification n section PRODUCTS acceptable manufacturers. will indicateAND DESIGN INTENT manufacturers but onlySimilarly, abase scenarios the one of the y Certain specification and or the designer manufacturers sections will then list product has designedwill bewill list other -— suppliers toe scheduled on the the system scheduled on multiple acceptable manufacturer ensure that plan sheet. with Consider a plan when bidding It is the responsibility for the sheet. In these by an acceptable°r the scheduled manufacturer using an acceptable base manufacturer constitutes manufacturer anufacturer ptable manufacturer albidders y�— other that theother than 1 Has investigated that the staan the base design intent is n the estigated specified met. Providing base >' level supplied mitter: or schedule g a product of the base product and deter d manufacturer — 2 Will provide the sapecified/sched mine specified/scheduled product. d that it meets or exceedssupplied the 3. As a result of product. pplied quality differences be product as for the base acceptable manufacturers between the base that may be re will coordinate installation z 4. Waives claims required for the Work to nstallatio Product and additional costs be nand make changes the other apparent. complete with to other 5. Will reimburse or time extension no additional cost to Work mburse Owner and that may subsequently Owner. approval by authorities. Architect for reviewgUently become 6. Will maintain or redesign services associated 3 02 INCONSISTENCIES or otherwise , clearances with re- — ENCIES provided by the base ' accesses and A. If there is specified/scheduled design intent shown Documents, inconsistency product. 4 meets, either the Y in the quality and/or quantity 3.03 SUB the Engineer/Architect's ngineer/grChit ctnd or quantity Work required accordance with GENERAL quantity of indicated shall ba Contract A. Proposed ithout change provided in — substitutions ge in the contract sum including are required to be e g but not limited to equivalent in B. When appearance all aspects to the specified in individual sections , quality, and prior to the bid due performance. specified products •— scheduled ors date for actual samples shall be specified Architects review 3 04 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS with be and approval before�ded a accepted; No Exceminimum of 12 days A MITATIONIS Exceptions. products other than those Where the Bid Documents 10 days before receipt of stipulatebids. a Project No• particular product, 21-2g083 substitutions will be considered -- upto City of Waterloo - Section 01 6000 - Pa Sullivan Brothers Plaza Page 2 of 4 Renovation - - bgl�tu�""' of proposed su ::: 0n G o data co\e each reques is WO comp rdvide a{du bh Product the sUbm�tteor exceeds the quality • — B.C. Are Contract Documents. d nt atin9 datae acceptability esenta<rr n that. it meets edified product. 1ith The mat o to determine e constitutes eu�t and determrn substitution as for Work hat may be requirede n rnfiOr substitution °sed P e sub °they eCom A request tprovide investigated de t prddueWarranty for changes tooth ea`J subsequently b to w Hasspe sere d i d WO 1 level°sthe prooidi the installationith no additional extension that m redesign seNrces associa — 2 Agre Agrees to coordinate O to be cOrnPlet costs°r tim r review °r red ate each 3 the Agrees Waives `o claims for rse 0additional d Architectlo e to accommdd 4• apparent. reimburse�te er an changestO other Work ed°n shop WillWequ�ing oe 5 a proo a1 by authorities. th anon do required indicated or lacceptanGe Will Q re-approval e' P rm When they are ton and When lete nest'orve the substitution Provide complete data substitution. considered separate written request, 2 D. proposed e t seP e Architect may approve P WO net b ou Substitutions i sub Without ct ad attached to — E• S Coduct data submittals, ontract Documents. °cu a product ism cover letter Loth sttosubstrtute s. Request Only -715 product to own bidder e Substitution tatiNe c3 F When a�Addendum a\Procedure W\th th e With Architect s rePresen issue Submittal ton coord\nat r1 sheets ; Substitution rt each substitution method, cons\aeration ta\ sm section• d fio11o`Ns: ail sd that a it is u' G. .1. "Transmit the preferred as 1e when submitting by edmU t p rr for c per submittal items . — this sPb email is where necessary for as foltutro Major ro all he y copies request F fr ONEngPatron of separate °. 2• fsDUf a Papercopiesl of 1e PD \ e destination ittal sheet the— a singdocument. Only to the ttansm far t e Submit five n all prepare Bookmarks se Use their ow a din one t sized all The subm\tier shall contain an 0 3• a submittal are F If the submitter elects t oriented correctly, Ads possible,pD cart of c Each file. en permitted. Within aahmen.1t. ages h or B 112rby 11 inch whenever when contained a in let,pages or — be a separateshall be c11 by 1� inch trtu W 1y be u1d e listed firoP d a. Scans shall be \ble• subs Lion• form i11 err she b e P ose cube t must be leg i proposed submitted°n one or components l only attesting to considered content st to one s suor products an Its,etc. net. ue substitutions rode t results, man each request ub ajar P d test a timely 4 Limit e1e proposed rctly related data,certified Prof°set reject request in tin 0 5 Multiple areproductof is t or rej except products hop drlence. urden of proof to accept be considered uts, 6 Submrc\equivalence.reply With a decisioncontract aWardl�\ng wilt noto strikes,lockouts, Requests for product or S rep educe `after d after Bid Opening N b races the Architectcannot The Architect Submittal Procedure received make a substitution circumstances. ire due in Writing to h y 1. Mons t d m ins t e Requests for Substitutions necessary t° duct,and shall be ctor scerta Substitution Sses where it is ne a ate that the Contractor i implied on H• of pro 1 RuGh cases discontinuance Contract er e e indicated°su muted of materials after days of tile When they are i rev\ously b th e — bankruptcy,� ent specified� e wh teal revision Substitution Within ten a separate previously material o equip' of be cotta ds v��haute will require sub ility of all allbemr will— obtainests for Substitution u o�tPUorduct Data submittals When acceptance e judge of the acceptability 2. Shop Drawings or Form, ° er will be the 1 Request. p°Guments� royal by they fter Bid Opening. _ Requests with approval received t rec on 01 6ggg-page 3°f 4 3• The pr sts for Substitution ue C S Sect eq p pR WNER'S25083EonsibioD s. echo 3.05 O Responsibilities.. esp Renovation Owners Brothers Plaza A• projectN°.21-25083 City of Waterloo-SulrNan 1. Arran 2. Contractor. 2. deliver 3 Arrange and owner reviewed 4. �n delivery, pay for ew s e. 5 items it claims products delivery to sit hop drawings productArra ith data and samples to Review Responsibilities: man urers warranties, and replace damaged, 2. Receive Owner bi/ities. es inspections, ma 3. H ever e and unload prod wed shop drawin and servged defective, or deficient 4. products e. 3�6 T Repair or store install is at site; gs' product data s. A. �4. Repq r or replace items da finish products pest for comp/e e esarnp/es B. loss of�a products o���gND�ING damaged aver receipt. s or damage jointly with If special factory calibration.pment in mannerC. precautions required, to prevent damage;storageinstructions for equipment,D. Transportrne and of package to avoid — le F surrounding arerials�n products in accordance �co dared materials. ate aa7 d prepared e legibly on outside of or�e�ptly�vspe t hi covered trucks to prevent manufacturer's anufacture , areas l s order to minimize d products to rs instructions e site Provide cts are ensure contamination of product disfigurement, and H. Arrange /vent, or damage, sodamaged that products comply oyn and littering =— 3'�, STORA ly r the return ge, and reminimize hye products pl y with requirements of A. D D PROTECT/ON packing handling. by met quantities 3 Designate re TECTIOIV g materials, such as wood s are installation receiving/storage hods to prevent soiling, anon sche g/st excessive dole ar°rage areas °d pallets, where economically g, C' Store and protect handling s for convenient pro nomic Store withtect products g and misapplication_ to work area so that ally feasible D. seals cts in ppiication area in Store accords °rdertfoem/n e de/iv favorablesensitive aprodd labels intact accordance E. For ex r Product.ucts in weatht and legible. manufacturers,ins minimize wale due according to —— F• Protectexterior storage rtight, climate- tractions. e of precipitation,products from damage products, controlled enclosures is p/ac es in G. contaminants. midlty, temperature, °r Bete an environment Comply with manufacturer's sunlight due to supports H. Cover anufsct ght and construction above y — u/travi ucti° groan d. I. toreespcOddetn subject:rs deterioration conditions ultraviolet light, dirtpaustoss' Weather, Store/Opse nation and oratio if sn and other foreign granular degradation with impervious m y. J. ProvPrevide ar materials on solid flat n of products. l ous sheet covering. Provide contact with g• Provide v prev equipment materialsurfaces in disfigure a a well-drained ell dr ventilation to that L. Arrange disfigurement, r damageersOnnel to store use corrosion, discoloration, in alned ayes prevent mixing acts are storageof products products b coloration or with damaged to permit y methods to staining Project No. 21-250g3 and arEmaynta maintained incess oac inspection. Periodically prevent soiling, ND OF SECTIO ceptab/e condition. inspect s N n. to verify City of Waterloo-Sullivan Brothers Plaza Reno Section 01 6000-page 4 °f 4 Renovation ENS M P."PCN SEC-1\oN O16000.' R QVES�S SUBS1I1v1ION E Date. _ rer 3 Playa Renovation pro.osed Manufactu 2�'25�a Brothers Architects project No: of Waterloo Sul\ivan facturer S.ecified Pr Git Manu — Project Name:prof action S�ecificat`on S 4. where aPPllcable �! ati on section edfic d sheet name m 11eu of sP u; Ind\cate drawM9 0 or'Supplier ca v end E.Mai1: t arr�e; '` N ` Fax o , Address Contact: F e hone ` 'Telephone: e1 p for Substitution. r No..Reason Yes: ice.? \tams ers No. 0 of Proposers\t Yes: No. I _ Substitutions Yes: c� for Subs the s for z Allow Cost Savings to ec�f�ed arson ton se Sp\de by side comparisons Does Proposed C to those Provide EgUNalentlSuper\or st`tut�on showing N°: � for the Sub Substitutions formation o Yes.. responsibility e W' osed Subs u product\n d products? accept re P from th — Are Prop marked-up proposed P is resulting Required) \d you provided rov\d f ed products and P a\\ additional Signature both the specs d accept all at ition proposed subbstit ion an \, anon of prop Subst�tut�on\nto the Comments: coord`n of proposed incorporation Architect's use't Accepted.. � _ For No Accepted' ate'. Required.. � -too t. Req No Action late'. Submission-. 1ncOmP Reviewed By.. Date.. 011000 QU\REMEN�S NUC SOSTRE EXECUtt�N A procedures. ENERA� ES d genera\installation p 01 SEC,�\ON\Na oU preparatro by trade. 0 am panels required 1. Examination, x �n rea P. Access pan Meetings. B. Pre-installation m out the work. C. and patching. e t D. cutting for laying t paymen E. Surveying 9 and prOtecta d eauipmen�Wner personneection f unch\'rst,excep Giea sterns of , corr G Start' °f systems On and instructs n9 Contractor s — H• Ue seout procedures including maintenance service procedures. ores ~i 1. procedures q requirements for mat ts: gubrn�ttals p exterior enclosures.General rea NTg uirernen oraN artitions. rice u Gen EN\E Requirements.. ea Controls.. nTemp interior n d�a�c�tena 2 J• 0 REaU\R drain\wary F s and con I emp°rare do an 0 ELATE 01 3000 - Administrative Facrlitre d controls: eats,°p ;. 1.02 R n 01 5p00 -"Temporary cord documents,Section Facilities an 0 , P. Project re Work of ctions0 t B. Sectro 50p0 -"Temporary o\ those se Section p1�g00 a Closeout eon required rn 2 C. dons. O en D. data Warranties Product Specification Selections of p 0 embers' cedures f affects: z PrOdnotrf\cation to otherctura\n' submittal pro Individual On cutting stru or alteration the �' E. Advance ts,for subm z 1. Lrmitat�ons Requirements, ttin9 Of cu 2• ace LS _ dminit written uest in advan 1 03 SUgN1\STS ction 0� 3000 Submit Wr\ttrenent of Pro\eresistant ele e ement' A. See to Patch\n weather of any eld or moisture operational tting d integrity exposed fete f any g. cu Structural We int ex e or safety ° ents• lntegr\ty of maintenance, exposed elements.2• Efi Work utilities of sight to contractor. 0 3• v\sual qualities or separate 4• Work of Ovrequest•. rk' Project. of atf affected wo used. 6 Include ca ion an of scr ption e a. Identification de and description es Or alteration. inducts to be Location for cutting d Work and p b. Necessity of propose d patching GOnfractor. — C. Alterd. native to cutting an wner or separate to cOntractOr' d act\' utilities. e. Alternatives t on work sion of affec e ecpar tua\locations of capped an f. Wr\tten per Work willAc cord actual g' pate and time Ot Accurately re e of work required d 1S locate h ct Record Documen zin in the type the Project insurance — c' Prot 1CAS\ONS employ a firm merited experience.the State in which Omissions 1 04 C�UA\A. o\ition of five ears of documented registered e xperiesurve`l°r s Errors an For d a um°f five y d survey evidence of — N. Minimum employ a lansubrrrit evidicate on 017p00_ age °f B. For suNc work, Architect. ro\teclnsurance cent P acceptable Sect coeaage\n the form of _ Project No.21-25083 Waterloo-Su11\van Brothers Plaza Renovation City of C. For Contact construction surveying u 1' Scope: StuebeN ping and b Sanitary Building Staking,* ta Oran 507/ding layout D. 2. Bidding: Requaeng herb and Gu fe at the option o f the c se r field engineering, proposal Refer fer to laner/Edge of ontractor, �•Og PROJECT on Pro Bering', e pOsal from�fer to pro °us Staki�jturninous employ/SG. SECT jest licensed aprofessional SG and include fora d�and additional Wat A. used in therOfessio e ude the tan nd d d onal Field errnain C accumulation enclosed N osT t DNS State in Which ngineecoot. ° amount jn b ormation. d Crew y and 8 Provide Control:l n°f dust,areas assist cur fil ch the Pr feet ithe dj�o iplineaeq b d — adjacent it teepositive Execute s, vapors, or of materials aidit ed for spec/fjc 1 �6 COORbINgTproprtymeanswo p e�methods gases. to dissipate humid; A. Coordinate sU d/natet scheduling, �e air-borne dminimize raisin dust fro humidity, and to prevent e efficient ad��og, submittals, an pers;n9 into at nstructlon operations. 8 With provisions mo pher an sio for accommodating orderly sequence d work of the s e over C Notify Co affected e Verify th utility co erlyseue items install various with building utility requirements and ms installed later.on f interdependent of the responsibilities utilit;equ/rements and comply With t pende construction Manua/ — bil/ties pint feet D. Coordinate for installing, character/ heir requirements. action eiem to that are indicated space a/oor connecting onned in of various of new operating ements, nts, conduit, as cater/ r astfling,requirements, g to, and sect/ors vice, e efficiently close/ sdiagrammatic supports placing in having interdependent aresuch compatible Ya E. In finish maximize able ch place drawings.installation of me construct/on re except Follow equipment. Coordinate ordinate otherwise installations, lines indicated electric G. After ate completion locations of fixtures indicated, ations, for,n °f building. for pipes, ducts, — an Owner ompl eti n and clean_ p o f�wor d t pipes,maintenance, Utilize spacesand u f work of and is�,jth f ducts and and for repair actd jwesk not in accordance o f premises, re PART 2 PRODUCTS nee with Contract coordinate separate sect/ Knish eleme wiring within t s. 1 PATCHING TS ntract e acre sections. he A. q New/NG MATERIALS Documents, otOs minimize correction disruption of Owner's work -,— and Materials: As 8 Type and workspeclfiedin Owners necessary, Quality of product sect/on C. a�'° referring Existing s° mate ProductSubstitution: g Prod h existing ='f— PART 3 Edescr/bed in StetC t/o to a existing Work as acts: Cstermine by inspecting g products and work r 3 U� EXAMINATION CM NgTt ION Section 01 6000 p00Y proposed uct change in nspecting and testing productsk for patching ,. A. ON Requirements. submit Where Verify thatements. bmit request f Start of existing site B. Verify Fork conditions for substitution appliedthat existingmeans acceptance and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequentspecificWaste measurements supportnew work. °rk. Verify that due to over-ordering before s described at utility er°rder/n9 or e confirming din individual work beingD. Project No. 21-25p83 are available, of the correctdens or beginning fabrication, at'On, to minimize characteristics, City of and in the correct Waterloo-Sullivan Broth Section 01 Brothers Plaza Renovation 7000 Page 2 of J meats 'including eleming ents to commendingrJuncovering n°vend patching eXistmea,s ditto ns prior d Patching of gutting or P 'Examine eXpef aUran cut<work. Beginning to Cutting.. rmovement during c of F P Ubject t°damage dmogsaffecting eG conditions. ria\ subStanG o� stance ner prior to assess acceptance of eXisting next material material ales or conditioner Ondrtro rio accept T\ON surfaces prior to applying prior to t paten to primer, c PREP ARp'substrate surta Of substrate P ended substrate b°nd' meeting at the site 3.02 A. Glean cracks°r openings p er requireder°sUb t nc�m contact a preinstallat�on met section. — B. S Apply manufacturer material S coons,convenee specific G. App ing any FETING Lion se r affected by work of th apply `corvine i ua\specrfica _ gT A individual th section o 3.p3 PREtN n required in \n9 work e directly affecting, ate. es. A. When to come dance of parties nce of meeting d and installation procedures. rOGedur ts,With t`tjO a n,preparation top Tres. Require attendance t Architect four days i at meeting.. rein a art B.C. Notify r agenda and preside S of eXaminat d work. S after mee�eg`siOns made Prepare Gonditn with related two day ted by — D. Review anon with aff ordin copies Within those e 0 2. Review coordination distribute r\;cipar'ts,a minutes Owner,P to starting work reference points Record prch;tect� � .. E' copies VT THE W OR survey control points prior discovered. permanent relocation required , 3.04 LAYING Mons°f any disci p site work., t or reference — a. a Architect of to staling ce point `. A Verify locations is prior of any referee Make no changes ? Promptly notify z. B. promp Nei control poi, coon C. protect construction. n ction Architect to others or �: ::ass original Survey c°ntrot. 0 stru �, during ort to p r in des tr O. p appdl points b s. strumer'tat�on and similar eat, 0 b survey practice t by m topsoil placement', to notice to Rep\ace dislocated outlay written n° d lay 0 rior sure an nd E' without prior recognized engine sea g levels. Locate stakes grading,fill a viz ,d 1e for g Utilize r elevations,line avements.,sta F' lish — G Estab riate means eats includindg Avert elevatwns' floor elevations appropriate improvements an Site imp Mons,slopes, round 13 utilityui locations, for structures locations,g r anon,column ears• survey work as it progresses. . G same and 2. Building foundation, of control layouts by sa replacement. 3 Periodically verify accurate l09 S nce with manufacturer's necessity for rep period complete and REQUIREMENTS orda to ece LA N REQn individual n Ise in accordance due n indicated. \-\. .in a comp sections,1 Mai ntain eco ions,dnd so as to avoid unless otherwiser re and GE►`�ERA�fNSTAt a specified in an \elements level, with adjacent vertical s 3.05 A install products ods and recommendations, and horizontal elements neatly aligned w ervdlse indicated. instr e vertical element fittings plumb and level, transitions,unless°th appearance. — B. Make t and indicated. n less trap tore and G. Install ntequipment 1 lines,unless otherwise surfaces,with seamless maintaining texture specified. Onta texture onsurfaces, show °r horiz t tex ten different where not Owner. Make Gonsisten between panels Architect) D. Make neat transitions b provide TRACE install access p rs w er the Ep B E e P ANELS p ar 1nce a\I dfun and will be subject to approval pp Section ch 70p0-page 3°f 7 3'p6 ACCESS Trade requiring n and fun Se A ed appearance ppeara ce B. The finish ,ovation 1_250g3 -Sullivan Brothers plaza Re Project No.2 CM of Waterloo C. Provide D. Access panels that accommodate 3 07 ALTERATIONS LTERATIO p op nate/y s shall meet alm�od to adjacent finishes A. Access erequirementsfoeacfln/shedspaces 1.existing record do existing h location thesized y2. Verify con are installed and s B. Keep areas Beginning o f alterations stru t i°Architect chit n and it arrangements are based°n casual hall be cu in whichs wor befor nts ar l field nd 1 S egi ing of alterations are constitutes disturbing eoas st�ndicated, observation a 2. Section 01 erect, and maintain ng conducted separated from t o °nditions C. Maintain as r proof her areas replacement Provide weatherproof exterior at srequired to separate demolition e partitions of construction that are still Where modifications; building mo/i ' construction o °n specified In 2 enclosu�peningo In take yng enclosure tl°n and nstru s ed " Insulate exweatherp weatherproof exterior enc/os are to prevent except for in ction from existing D existing ure exist water and terruptions frog Remove existing s work. ducts°r pipes that provide conSt umlglty da required for 2. With net,rotted ow indicated an are exposed to outdoruction to make exter/or 3 Remove itemsconstruction corroded metals,as required ambient temperatures �' 4. Whlee neocate w items indicated on specified.drawings. and deteriorated accomplish new work. peratues by an surface d o gs. k. necessary d prepare dace finishes drawings. masonry and 5, Wherecessary forexisting surfaces to be concrete;replace new successful s as o applied to E. Servicessurfaces to surface finishes requfed to receive work 1 extend existing(Including but atch o adjacent finished surfaces specifiened or new finish;�em°om removals, Maintain systems limited to d surtaces asr indicated, ve existing finish ain existing ms to accommodate co HVAC close/ patch h if o quiprnent and actives mmOdate new a Y as possible holes and dam 2. provide access stems that ar w construction. onstr and Electrical): aged ess panel. al components;if necessary,to rerna ntin o cal); Remove relo where existin asreaetivation pgtsYstems ore Aeration• cate and 3. sas re u/red/ng a back into ope orl on It ore act/ve modify installation to ales existing not atio s to for service. tex S systems9 s serve occupied cc condition;repair supply,Contract Documents allow access dua. ration existing systems Ystems in service facilitiestin but e distribution, and require b. Provide temporary of outages only to until new system to be rep/aced equipment 4' Verify thateq with 5. Re abandoned connections make switchovers s are complete andnew _ Remove abandoned ctions as ready access/ble doned services serve onrlequlan to and connections. and tag withceilings; pipe, , ducts Y abandoned minimize coide gs' remove conduits andoned existing systems 1.Protect existing workn, patch holes source of suppl equipment, i ncluding in service. 2. Perform ew Prevent movement ove entto remain• left by removal using m ssib ego otthosherwise above 3' Repair cutting toaccomplish °f structure; materials specified cap stub pair ad acco ; provide shoring pec/f/eq for new b adjacent construction removals °ring and bracing eatly and as if during for necessary. s neat ng re cutting new , and s removal work. work. smooth transition as possible. City of Waterloo_Sullivan Section 01 7000-Page 4 Brothers Plaza Renovation of 7 H. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish. I. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match. J. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site. K. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. L. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements. C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 6 6 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. a 7. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. cis — D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate z surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to F,o original condition. _ E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant 6 ` ` elements, and sight exposed surfaces. 1. All other cutting and patching is to be performed by the responsible trade. F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior 0 approval. G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 0,r Amft H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. z I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids mo with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated ° element. J. Patching: c� 2 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.09 PROGRESS CLEANING — A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 7000 - Page 5 of 7 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate — work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement — of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material — manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible. 3.11 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. _ D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.12 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION - — A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other -- — season within six months. C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. 3.13 ADJUSTING LL. A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.14 FINAL CLEANING -" A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The intent of final cleaning is to provide the Owner with a product that is free of all dust, dirt, and debris related to the Work, and in a like new condition. — B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft — surfaces. D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. — E. Wipe clean wood and laminate surfaces including doors, countertops, cabinets, windows, sills and all other similar surfaces. F. Wipe clean all painted surfaces.G. Clean all hard finish floors including tile and sealed concrete and all others according to manufacturer's instructions. Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 7000 - Page 6 of 7 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation H. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. I. Clean filters of operating equipment. J. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner. 3.15 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. —' 3.16 MAINTENANCE P, A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. ' B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 7000 - Page 7 of 7 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit preliminary draft of proposed format and outline of contents in a PDF format before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return with comments. C. Final Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit final manual and electronic copies with claim for final Application for Payment. Architect will retain one electronic copy. The original manual and one electronic copy will be provided to the Owner. 1. At the option of the Owner provide only an electronic copy in PDF format. D. Warranties and Bonds: Include originals and electronic copy of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will (- be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. F. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 7800 - Page 1 of 4 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. -- 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA _. A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. _ 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. D. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. — 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and -- maintenance of the specific products. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and _ alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 7800 - Page 2 of 4 -- City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. J. Include test and balancing reports. K. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants,Contractor, and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. cc F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents insin each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents 5 on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. L - H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. cc I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows: 1. Project Directory. 2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category. 0. a. Source data. b. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals. c. Operation and maintenance data. 5 d. Field quality control data. e. Original warranties and bonds. K. Electronic Copy: Provide two copies of all operation and maintenance data in a PDF format on a flash drive. Locate storage devices in the front of the operation and maintenance manual. Label device with project name and substantial completion date. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. Project No. 21-25083 Section 01 7800 - Page 3 of 4 "- City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART IGENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The Electrical Contract Installation shall include a complete Electrical Installation for the project. All conduit, fixtures and equipment herein specified, mentioned or shown on Drawings, shall be furnished and installed in place, connected up and ready for normal operation except for such items as are specifically mentioned to be furnished by others. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED: A. The Electrical Contract shall include all work under the listed Sections of the Specifications Index and all related Electrical work as shown on the Drawings for the project. B. A Complete table of Electrical Reference Symbols is shown on the plans. C. Under this Contract the Electrical Contractor shall furnish the Owner with two 3-ring binders of all pertinent systems related documents. Submit manuals to the Engineer for his review. The Engineer will then turn books over to the Owner. The books shall contain the following items: 1. Shop drawings on all major equipment. 2 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions for all major equipment. 4. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. 5. Control drawings for any systems not furnished under other contracts. D. The Electrical contractor is responsible for own equipment, such as cranes, lifts. etc. in order to provide a complete installation of Electrical systems. E. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for contacting the utility company and coordinating the power connection for the building service. Include all costs in bid. F. Coordinate utility service outages and reconnections with Utility Company and Owner. `? G. Branch feeders, branch wiring, receptacles, special outlets, switches, light fixtures, dimmers, contactors, starters, timers, etc., as shown on the plans or required for operation of the electrical system. H. Repair of all damage done to the premises as a result of the installation and removal of all debris or surplus material left by those engaged in the work. I. All new outside building lighting and sign lighting, including wiring, timers, photocells, switches and circuit breakers. 1.04 SPECIFICATIONS COMPLIANCE A. The requirements of these specifications shall be complied with in every respect. Therefore, it shall be absolutely mandatory that the job foreman, all lead electricians, subcontractors and their foreman have completely studied these specifications, be completely knowledgeable as to their entire contents, and maintain a copy at the job-site. Failure to comply with this requirement will be reason to presume the electrician or subcontractor is not in responsible charge of his work due to ignorance of job requirements, and will be reason for the owner to require dismissal and replacement with approved personnel. Every foreman and lead mechanic shall be provided with a complete copy of this specification. 1.05 INCONSISTENCIES A. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation without change in the contract sum. -- 1.06 CODES, FEES AND LATERAL COSTS: A. The Electrical Installation shall meet all applicable local, state and federal codes and standards. All permits necessary for a complete electrical installation shall be paid for by this Contractor. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0010 - Page 1 of 3 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation B. Except in those municipalities which provide state-approved electrical inspection, all installation of electrical equipment wiring shall be inspected by the State Board of Electricity. Allowance shall be made in the bid and contract for the cost of such inspection. C. Fees for such inspection will be charged in accordance with the rules and regulations of the State Board of Electricity. Evidence of payment of fees shall be provided by the Contractor with his Request for Payment. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. — 1.08 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. C. The contractor shall submit four(4)copies of shop drawings on all equipment and materials to the engineer for approval. The contractor shall not use any equipment or materials that does not have the engineer's stamped approval. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1.09 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.11 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION: A. This Contractor shall coordinate his work with other Contractors on this job. Any conflict which — cannot be resolved shall be settled by the Architect/Engineer. B. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.C. The Contractors shall check architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical plans to avert possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original plans be necessary to resolve such conflicts this Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started. D. Discrepancies shown on different plans or between plans and actual field conditions or — between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for a decision. E. The Contractor shall consider and review the complete set of documents, etc., Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, etc., (Drawings and Specifications) as his complete set. He — will be responsible for any and all electrical work shown or stated (to be by him), to include this work in his bid and install such items even though they are not specifically shown or stated on the Electrical section of the plans and specifications. — F. The drawings are indicative of the work to be installed, but do not show all bends, fittings, boxes and specialties required to complete the installation. G. All conduits, wires, outlets boxes, switches, receptacles, devices and fixtures shall be included in the work. H. Where it is stated that the contractor shall "provide" a device or piece of equipment, it shall mean that such a device or equipments are finished and installed.1.12 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND FIRESTOPPING: A. The Electrical Contractor shall set all sleeves in construction for their Work. B. Where cutting is required, it shall be done by the Electrical Contractor.C. All patching shall be done by Electrical Contractor. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0010 - Page 2 of 3 -- City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation D. All conduit and outlet installations and cutting of any kind must be done with great care so as not to leave unsightly surfaces which may not be entirely concealed by plates, escutcheons, or their normal concealing construction, if such unsightly conditions occur, Electrical Contractor will be required, at their own expense, to replace the damaged construction. E. This Electrical Contractor shall provide and install firestopping materials per Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 1.13 SCAFFOLDING: A. Furnish and erect all scaffolding, ladders, etc., required in the installation of wiring, equipment and fixtures. 1.14 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL COSTS: A. If the Mechanical Contractor substitutes equipment for specified units, the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for any additional electrical installation costs for this substitution whether the other equipment was listed as equal in the specification or was approved equal after the project was in the bidding process. 1.15 GUARANTEE: A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in this contract and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from the time of final acceptance of his work by the Owner. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in this contract and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and cr materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from date of final substantial completion. PART 2NOT USED PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. Provide necessary power wiring for equipment furnished by others. Verify requirements with the Contractors responsible to supply each piece of equipment. Provide heavy duty disconnect switches as indicated. z 3.02 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: A. Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all deviations from contract drawings and specifications. He shall neatly and correctly enter in colored crayon any deviations on drawings affected, and shall keep drawings available for inspection. Extra set of drawings will be furnished for this purpose. B. At the completion of the job, and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide a o complete set of as-built drawings. The Contractor shall show locations for all major electrical �. devices, including panelboards and all major runs of conduit, the circuiting of each fixture, outlet, etc., shall be shown. Certify to the accuracy of each print, by signature thereon, and deliver same to Architect. END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0010 - Page 3 of 3 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0505 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as indicated. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. D. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. pp Y• C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Use materials to match fire rating of wall. D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed. E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0505 - Page 1 of 2 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Wiring connectors. C. Electrical tape. D. Heat shrink tubing. E. Wire pulling lubricant. F. Cable ties. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 2013 (Reapproved 2018). B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, — Medium-Hard, or Soft 2011 (Reapproved 2017). C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020). D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation 2004 (Reapproved 2020). a E. ASTM D3005- Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape 2017. F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically 2 Insulating Rubber Tapes 2020. G. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. H. NEMA WC 70- Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy 2021. I. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems z 2017. J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. UL 44 -Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 486A-486B -Wire Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid conflicts with piping or other potential conflicts. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0519 - Page 1 of 5 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a '- Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted. D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted. E. Service entrance cable is not permitted. F. Armored cable is not permitted. G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted. 1. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used: a. Where exposed to damage. b. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as suitable for those locations. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D. Comply with NEMA WC 70. E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. _ F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. G. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. — Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. H. Minimum Conductor Size: a. Exceptions: 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0519 - Page 2 of 5 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG. I. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape. 3. Color Code: a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray. b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. d. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor Stranding: ' 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2. b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. 2.04 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the r° conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable. B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors. C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs. 2. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device. 3. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection. 4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors where connectors are required. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Electrical Tape: Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0519 - Page 3 of 5 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed —' as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. 2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying — with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D. C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. — D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION — A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. — C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3 z 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required. -- 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location indicated. 5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power- limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as � separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the following conditions: a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors. — b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating. c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors. 7. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). D. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other — contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum — pulling tension and sidewall pressure. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0519 - Page 4 of 5 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. E. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. G. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet. H. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. I. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. J. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without _ cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. K. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. 1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. 2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. 3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing. L. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. M. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under"Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible. N. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. O. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 -Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0519 - Page 5 of 5 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding requirements. B. Conductors for grounding and bonding. C. Connectors for grounding and bonding. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. C. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for pole- mounted luminaires. D. Section 33 7900 - Site Grounding. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. B. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with 5 specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode. ` o 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. E B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having 0 jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. D. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Raceways may be used as sole equipment grounding conductor where permitted by NFPA 70. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor where indicated or required, including but not limited to: Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0526 - Page 1 of 3 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation a. In each nonmetallic feeder and branch circuit raceway. — b. In each flexible conduit. c. In outdoor portions of each metallic feeder and branch circuit raceway utilizing non- threaded fittings (where permitted) supplying rooftop multimotor and combination- load air-conditioning and refrigerating equipment. 3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit —' equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. — 6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement. 7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode. b. Metal gas piping. — 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in =— raceway). C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors — and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. _ — 3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. PART 3 EXECUTION _ 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. — B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. — 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. — 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0526 - Page 2 of 3 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. C. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 0 1.1 u z 0 6 Li z 0 0 0 z 0 0 0 L anora z Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0526 - Page 3 of 3 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. B. Section 26 0533.13- Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits. C. Section 26 0533.16- Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes. D. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for exterior luminaires. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 2017. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware 2016a. C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 2019. D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication 2004. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation. 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations. 4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: —' 1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 3000. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with applicable building code. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0529 - Page 1 of 3 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. — 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or -- approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4.E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors. 3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. 5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. 6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood: Use wood screws. 9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted. 10. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically — designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4. b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut)framing system.11. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES)for compliance with applicable building code. PART 3 EXECUTION — 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0529 - Page 2 of 3 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable. D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. H. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut)to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel (strut)to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000. 5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. I. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. ft J. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. K. Remove temporary supports. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. 0 C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended byo manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. z D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. o E. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. ;, 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. F. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. o z G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. -- END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0529 - Page 3 of 3 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0533.13 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). B. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC). D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC)conduit. G. Conduit fittings. H. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. o 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS ft c� A. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC) 2020. B. ANSI C80.3 -American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S)2020. C. ANSI C80.5 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit--Aluminum (ERMC-A)2020. D. ANSI C80.6 -American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit 2018. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. o F. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT) 2013. z G. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit 2004. H. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC)2017. " I. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable 2014. o J. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 2018. K. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit 2020. L. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 2021. — M. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. N. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 6A- Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions. S. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions. T. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 1 of 7 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation U. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. i 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: — 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet,junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits _ embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm)trade size and larger. a__--•,':: 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. c:— 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. - — PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, implies all applications are acceptable. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Underground: — 1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit. 2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit. 3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground. -- 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm)trade size is provided, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends. D. Embedded Within Concrete: — 1. Within Slab on Grade: Not permitted. 2. Within Slab Above Ground: Not permitted. 3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, _ intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit(RTRC). 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC)conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from concrete. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 2 of 7 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or aluminum rigid metal conduit. I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: a. Where exposed below 12 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. b. Where exposed below 20 feet in warehouse areas. K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. L. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or Schedule 40 PVC. M. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use aluminum rigid metal conduit. N. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 1. Maximum Length: 6 feet. it O. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm)trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm)trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 3/4 inch ( 21 mm)trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch (16 mm)trade size. 5. Underground, Interior: 1 inch (27 mm)trade size. 6. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm)trade size. D. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: _ 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle. 3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 3 of 7 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland)type fittings are not permitted. 2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT(RMC) A. Manufacturers: _ 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle. 3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. - 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use aluminum. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland)type fittings are not permitted. 2.05 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle. 3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. - c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland)type fittings are not permitted. 2.06 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle. - 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: - a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 4 of 7 - City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT(LFMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC)jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. C. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.08 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. C. Fittings: -- 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying witha. UL 514B. a. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type. z a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. 2.09 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, `E Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. _ B. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. ca ca 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit -- and fittings to be installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101. _ D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102. E. Install intermediate metal conduit(IMC) in accordance with NECA 101. F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111. G. Conduit Routing: Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 5 of 7 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required. 3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. - 4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated: a. Electrical rooms. b. Mechanical equipment rooms. c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling. - 5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where - practical. 6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. -- 8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. - 10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems. 11. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters.b. Hot water piping. .17 c. Flues. 12. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. H. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. _ 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. 5. Use metal channel (strut)with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits. 6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. 7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut)with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. 8. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. I. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. _ 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. 7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. J. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 6 of 7 - City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. _ 8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. K. Underground Installation: 1. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches. b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab. 2. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 0553 along entire conduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased. L. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit c installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. M. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential c? substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. cr .i 2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. o N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. z ` 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. END OF SECTION 0 0 0 Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 7 of 7 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0533.16 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches. C. Underground boxes/enclosures. D. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. _ C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices: 1. Wall plates. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2010. C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical MetallicCL- Tubing, and Cable 2014. a co D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2020. E. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. ca F. SCTE 77- Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity 2017. 5 G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current o Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 508A- Industrial Control Panels Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, 2 or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. Z 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70. 4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70. 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity. 7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush- mounted boxes where indicated. 8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 1 of 4 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES — A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable — minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: a. 1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete. 4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. 8. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. LL 9. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use t„ field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted. 10. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 5 508A. z 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: -- a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: — a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes: a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable. — 5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. D. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: -- 1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. — 3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 2 of 4 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 4. Applications: a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier 8 load rating. b. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic. 5. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products: www.hubbellpowersystems.com/#sle. b. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable. c. Product(s): 1) MacLean Highline PHA Series: Straight wall, all-polymer concrete splice box/pull box; available Tier 8, Tier 15, and Tier 22 load ratings. (a) 11 by 18 by 12 inches nominal; Model PHA111812 (stackable). 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Flashing Panels for Exterior Wall Penetrations: Premanufactured components and accessories as required to preserve integrity of building envelope; suitable for boxes and facade materials to be installed. _ 1. Manufacturers: a. Quickflash Weatherproofing Products, Inc: www.quickflashproducts.com/#sle. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. a. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION o A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA a 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not u indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. E. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. ° Cr F. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are 2 indicated or permitted. G. Box Locations: 1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 3100 as required where approved by the Architect. -� 2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. 3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. — 5. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. 6. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. H. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 3 of 4 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. I. Install boxes plumb and level. J. Flush-Mounted Boxes: '- 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface. _ 2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box. K. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. L. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: 1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep. 2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas. 3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade.4. Provide cast-in-place concrete collar constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000, minimum 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep, around enclosures that are not located in concrete areas. 5. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place. M. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. N. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. O. Close unused box openings. P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. Q. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. R. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 4 of 4 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Underground warning tape. E. Warning signs and labels. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z535.2 -American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017). B. ANSI Z535.4 -American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE cis — A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are not already identified in accordance with specified requirements. B. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Panelboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil. 5) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces. b. Transformers: 1) Identify kVA rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. c. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1) Identify voltage power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 2) Identify load(s) served. Include location. 2. Service Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. 3. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0553 - Page 1 of 3 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 5. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available — fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following. a. Service equipment. 6. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent. — C. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519. 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded — and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. — D. Identification for Devices: 1. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection, where permitted. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. 2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non- conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. 4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser- etched text. 5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch u_ high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B. Identification Labels: 1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant.2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. C. Format for Equipment Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. 2. Legend: a. Equipment designation or other approved description. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch. 5. Color: — a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around — self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0553 - Page 2 of 3 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated. B. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil. C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape. D. Color: 1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background. 2.05 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. B. Warning Signs: 1. Materials: a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive vinyl signs. 2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners. 3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning Labels: 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self- adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. 2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 0 A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions. o 3.02 INSTALLATION o A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. z B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. 3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear 0 access. rri 4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. 8. Devices: Outside face of cover. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws. H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible. END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0553 - Page 3 of 3 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0583 WIRING CONNECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES. B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA WD 1 -General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015). B. NEMA WD 6 -Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications 2016. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. `° C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ° PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for ci; equipment. 1. Colors: Comply with NEMA WD 1. a 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. 3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726. C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0533.13. D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519. E. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0533.16. 2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. '— 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0583 - Page 1 of 2 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION c 0 c a acn J_ >- C z o 0 0 H 01 H Z 0 0 0 U- H z I Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0583 - Page 2 of 2 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outdoor motion sensors. B. Outdoor photo controls. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches, wall dimmers, and fan speed controllers. E. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C136.10 -American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment- Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles- Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing 2017. B. ANSI C136.24 -American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment- a, Nonlocking (Button)Type Photocontrols 2020. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2010. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. UL 773 - Plug-in, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 773A- Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control Current Edition, Including — All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. C. Field Quality Control Reports. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0923 - Page 1 of 3 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in — this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having — jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after — installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.2.02 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: 1. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier. B. Stem-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls: 1. Description: Direct-wired photo control unit with threaded conduit mounting stem and field-adjustable swivel base, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773A. • 2. Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant polycarbonate. 3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide. 4. Provide external sliding shield for field adjustment of light level activation. 5. Light Level Activation: 1 to 5 footcandles turn-on and 3 to 1 turn-off to turn-on ratio with delayed turn-off. 6. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. — 7. Failure Mode: Fails to the on position. 8. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. C. Locking Receptacle-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls 1. Description: Plug-in locking type photo control unit complying with ANSI C136.10 for mounting on a compatible receptacle, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773. 2. Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant UV stabilized polypropylene, color to be selected. 3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide. 4. Light Level Activation: 1 to 3 footcandles turn-on and 1.5 to 1 turn-off to turn-on ratio with instant turn-on and delayed turn-off. — 5. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 6. Failure Mode: Fails to the on position. 7. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. _ 8. Surge Protection: 160 joule metal oxide varistor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall plates. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0923 - Page 2 of 3 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices. F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting control devices in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of lighting control devices provided under this section. C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place. F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 26 2726. G. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. H. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. <j I. Outdoor Photo Control Locations: 1. Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down. 2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources, including light sources controlled by the photo control itself. J. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control. END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0923 - Page 3 of 3 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 0943 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Low voltage lighting control system and associated components: 1. Main units . 2. Control stations. _ 3. Wired sensors. 4. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. B. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices - Lutron: 1. Finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section. C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Luminaires and associated components, for interface with lighting control system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ISO 9001 -Quality Management Systems-Requirements. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. > c� C. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association. 4 D. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. c3 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 0 1. Coordinate the placement of sensors and wall controls with millwork, furniture, equipment, "— etc. installed under other sections or by others. cc ' 2. Coordinate the placement of wall controls with actual installed door swings. o 3. Coordinate the work to provide luminaires and lamps compatible with the lighting controls to be installed. c� 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain 0 direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install sensors and wall controls until final surface finishes and painting are S complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. Z B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, _ service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. OccupancyNacancy Sensors: Include detailed basic motion detection coverage range diagrams. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 <http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document name=NFPA 70>. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Company with not less than three years of experience manufacturing lighting control —' systems of similar complexity to specified system. 2. Registered to ISO 9001 <http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ISO 9001>, including in- - house engineering for product design activities. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 1 of 15 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in — accordance with warranty. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. 1. System Requirements , Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: — 1) Lighting Control System Components, Except Those Listed Below: Between 32 and 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: Less than 90 percent, non-condensing. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Intelligent Lighting Controls, Inc.B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for approval by Architect a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis. 2. By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated s- costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete ,-s— engineered shop drawings (including power wiring)with deviations from the original design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to rough- in. C. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as suitable for the purpose indicated. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated. C. Device Finishes: 1. Wall Controls: Match finishes specified for Wiring Devices in Section 26 2726, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS A. Hardware Features: 1. Controller Back-Box: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a factory furnished; UL listed NEMA 1 enclosure designed for wall mounting. Back-box must be capable of being shipped ahead of controller chassis insert to allow for rough-in of all electrical connections prior to receipt of the controller chassis insert. 2. Controller Chassis Insert: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a factory or field installable controller chassis insert. Controller chassis insert shall contain all controller electronics, power supplies, relays, contactors and other required components. Controller chassis inserts shall arrive at the project site completely pre-wired and requiring only the connection of lighting circuits and control devices. 3. Line Voltage /Control Voltage Separation: Each programmable lighting controller shall be — provided with a mechanical barrier that separates all line voltage components and wiring from all control voltage components and wiring. An additional barrier may be installed within the line voltage section that shall provide isolation between normal and emergency circuits where required. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943- Page 2 of 15 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 4. Controller Covers: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a dead front screw-held or hinged locking cover that is designed for either surface or flush mounting. If a hinge locking door is provided, it shall be provided with a slam-latch with 2 keys and door hooks to assist in mounting. B. Electrical 1. Controller Power Supply: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a dual-rated, UL listed Class 2 transformer capable of either 120/277 VAC or 120/347 VAC primary (50 to 60 Hz). It shall contain an internal self-resetting fuse. 2. Connections: All connections shall be made to clearly and permanently labeled termination points. C. Controller Electronics: 1. Controller CPU: Each programmable controller shall be provided with a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that shall provide all the programming and control functions for the entire controller. 2. Real-Time Clock: Each controller shall be provided with a Real-Time Clock used to perform all time-controlled functions. It shall use a high voltage line-sync circuit for timing and a crystal for backup. Clock accuracy shall be held +/- 2 minutes per year and displayed to the second with the line-sync setting. Real-Time Clock functions shall include time of day, day of week, date and automatic daylight saving time and leap year adjustments. Time clock shall be protected against loss of time during a power outage for a period of up to 45 days without power of any type. Daylight Saving Time shall be adjustable with an enable/disable feature. Systems relying on a single clock device shall not be acceptable. 3. Relay Driver Module: Relay output cards shall be provided to expand the controller u capability from 8 to 64 relay outputs in increments of 8. Electronics shall feature surge protection and optic-isolation. It shall also provide an interface for mounting input boards. 4. Relay Control Switches: Controller shall contain push-button switches to turn all relays ON or OFF without the presents of any programming. 5. Back-up and Restore: The controller shall be equipped with an internal memory backup and restore capability. It shall have the ability to backup all internal programming into additional onboard memory, verify present programming with backup, and restore programming. 6. Runtime Logging: The controller shall be equipped with memory to log the runtime of each relay. It shall be capable of storing up to 30 days or 1092 hours of data and be able to be exported in a delimitative format. fr 7. Non-Volatile Memory: Controller shall contain a minimum of 4 Mb of non-volatile EEPROM memory with a data retention of>200 years and electrostatic discharge protection of >4000V. 8. Power Input Surge Suppression: The controller's 24VAC power input shall be equipped with double surge suppression to protect the electronics from transient over-voltages. — Protection shall clamp over-voltages up to 123 volts. 9. Data Line Surge Suppression: The controller data line communications shall be equipped with transient voltage suppression protection that will protect the electronics from electrostatic discharge and other transient over-voltages. Protection shall clamp transients up to 8kv direct discharges and 15kv air discharges. 10. Data Line Communications: The controller shall be equipped with serial communications through RJ45 connectors for communicating on CAT-5 cable with other panels and LightSync devices. It shall also be equipped with a separate local port for communicating with LightSync devices. The communications shall consist of 2-RS485 data lines. 11. USB Serial Communications: A USB port shall be provided for programming and interfacing the system with the use of a personal computer. 12. TCP/IP Communications: A TCP/IP port shall be provided for programming and interfacing the system with a personal computer over a network (LAN)or the internet (WAN). 13. Optional Module Interface: The controller shall contain 4 ports for interfacing optional modules which includes communications and power. Optional modules shall be able to be mixed on each controller. D. Switching and Control Devices: Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 3 of 15 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Device Node Capacity: The lighting controller shall support switch input control of up to 64 data line LightSync devices locally per panel and 254 per network for up to 16,510 devices. The first 8 device nodes shall be powered by the lighting controller. The addition of a power supply or power supply/repeater shall be required for each additional 20 device — nodes. Each LightSync device shall have a unique address and shall be capable of being programmed to the applicable functions described in the Switched Input Types heading in this specification. 2. Data Line Media: The data line shall consist of RS485 communications protocol — transmitted over CAT-5, CAT-5E, or CAT-6 Cable. The cable shall have male RJ45 connectors installed on each end for interfacing controllers and LightSync devices. Both daisy chain and "T" (3 direction branching)of cable runs shall be permitted. "T" branching shall be accomplished by the addition of power supply/repeaters. It shall be able to be —" wired in a home run configuration for LightSync devices by the addition of a LightSync Hub. 3. LightSync Switch Stations: LightSync data line switch stations shall be available in momentary push button (1-6 switches and pilots) and each switch shall have an associated pilot light. Each button shall control any or all of the relays in the lighting controllers or the dimmer outputs on the network. There shall be an option to program each pilot LED to indicate the state of any relay, group, preset, and static on or off. It shall also have the capability to reverse the status: LED is ON if the relay is OFF etc. 4. LightSync Photocell Controllers: The photo controller shall be provided with 256 light to dark levels (0-1800fc). It shall allow selection of 8 individual set points for OFF and ON and includes a selectable range of dead-band. It shall be programmable for 2 or 30 seconds delay. Each set point shall control any or all of the relays in the lighting controllers or the dimmer outputs on the network. 5. LightSync Input Modules: The input module shall provide 4 inputs that accepts momentary, momentary PB and maintained switch closures. Each input shall be optically isolated and have the ability to accept dry contact closures or 12-24VDC signals. Each input shall control any or all of the relays in the lighting controllers or the dimmer outputs on the network. It shall provide four pilot outputs that provide true status of relays, groups and presets. It shall be installed in the control panel or remote mounted. 6. LightSync Disable Key Switch: The disable switch shall provide a RJ45 connector that shall disable all LightSync devices down line with the closure of a key switch. It shall also .. provide two RJ45 connectors to pass data through. It shall indicate with an LED when the z disable switch is active. 0 7. LightSync Occupancy Sensor Input Module: The occupancy sensor input module shall ca provide power and inputs for motion sensors. It shall have 4 or 8 independent inputs that " shall be able to interface multiple sensors. Each input shall control any or all of the relays in the lighting controllers or the dimmer outputs on the network. It shall be installed in the control panel or remote mounted. 8. LightSync 0-10V Dimmer Output Module: The 0-10VDC dimmer output module shall be designed to control dimmable ballasts or other 0-10VDC devices. Each module shall have 4 independent output channels that can control up to 200 devices per output at .5mA per device. It shall have the capability to vary its level 256 steps between 0 and 10VDC. It Inmr shall be able to respond to photo controllers, switch inputs, DMX512 signals, and timers. It shall be installed in the control panel or remote mounted. 9. LightSync Motor Control Output Module: The motor control output module shall be designed to control shade motors, louver motors, blind motors, skylights, or any other class 2 DC motors. Each module shall have 4 independent outputs that can be controlled by a switch input, photocell, or timer. The control time shall be selectable from .1 to 300 seconds. Each lighting controller shall handle up to 8 modules with 4 outputs on each. — Each output shall be equipped with a limit switch input for each direction of the motor. 10. Graphical Touch Screen Control Station: The Touch screen control station shall display the status and control the lighting control panel relay outputs via preprogrammed control objects on standard or custom bitmap screens. — E. Programming: Programmable controllers shall be capable of being programmed, monitored, backed-up, or controlled through any of the below methods. All programming changes shall take effect immediately as they are programmed and shall not suspend or disable switches or — other system functions. The same functions shall be available for any of the connection types. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943- Page 4 of 15 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Local Keypad and Display: The system user shall be able to program, monitor and control any of the controller features and functions through the use of simple menu-driven self- - prompting user interface consisting of a 4-line 20-character backlit LCD display and 8 selection keys that change function based on the current operating mode. 2. USB Serial Direct Connect: The system user shall be able to program, monitor or control any of the controller features and functions utilizing LightLEEDer Pro Windows-based graphical user interface software using a USB port from a PC. 3. Modem Connect: The system user shall be able to remotely program, monitor or control any of the controller features and functions utilizing LightLEEDer Pro Windows-based graphical user interface software using a PC/modem on an analog phone line. 4. TCP/IP Connect: The system user shall be able to remotely program, monitor or control any of the controller features and functions utilizing LightLEEDer Pro Windows-based graphical user interface software using a PC with TCP/IP on a LAN or WAN. F. Diagnostics: Programmable controllers shall have the ability to do the following diagnostics. 1. Power Status: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with an LED on the controller and each output board that shall indicate that power is present. 2. Keypad: System users shall be able to view thru the keypad the current status of any relay, input, group, or preset and force any ON or OFF. 3. Software: System users shall be able to view thru the LightLEEDer Pro software the current status of any relay, input, group, or preset and force any ON or OFF. It shall also have the ability to scan the network for devices and controllers and then poll them to verify network quality. 4. Relay Cycle Test: The controller shall have a cycle test for relays to turn them off/on/off and then return them to the original state to verify proper operation. It shall display the a. results for each relay for turning the relay ON and OFF. 5. Device Finder: It shall have the capability through the keypad to find LightSync devices, dimmer devices, and motor devices on the network. c� - Z 6. Switch Test Mode: It shall be able to enter a switch test mode, where a switch input status LED will light when switch inputs are activated. It shall disable normal control when in this v mode. 7. Demo Clock: It shall have the ability to speed the clock's time by 10, 30, or 60 times for ' testing timer functions. o G. Power Failure and Power-Up: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with circuitry that shall automatically shut down the controller whenever the incoming power fails to be delivered to the controller within required limits. When power is returned to the controller, one of the following power-up modes will be implemented for each controlled relay output in the system. 1. No Action: Upon restoration of incoming control power, the controller electronics shall be restarted and resume normal operations and all circuits will be maintained in the condition they were last in. 2. Turn ON: Controller shall turn the selected relay output to the ON state after power-up. e 3. Turn ON if Input Closed: Controller shall turn the selected relay output to the ON state after power-up if local input selected is closed. It shall be able to select any input to monitor. 4. Turn OFF: Controller shall turn the selected relay output to the OFF state after power-up. 5. Turn OFF if Input Closed: Controller shall turn the selected relay output to the OFF state after power-up if local input selected is closed. It shall be able to select any input to monitor. 6. On if Open Time, OFF if Closed Time: Controller shall turn the selected relay output to the ON state during Open hours and shall turn selected relay outputs to the OFF state during Closed hours. This shall be used in conjunction with OPEN/CLOSED timers. 7. OFF if Open Time, ON if Closed Time: Controller shall turn the selected relay output to the OFF state during Open hours and shall turn selected relay outputs to the ON state during Closed hours. This shall be used in conjunction with OPEN/CLOSED timers. 8. Time of Day: Controller shall turn the selected relay output to the ON or OFF state based on the time of day in 30 minute increments for every day of the week. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943- Page 5 of 15 -' City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation H. True Relay Status Feedback: Each controller shall be provided with circuitry that shall monitor the actual current status of each relay via a set of pilot contacts mechanically linked to the relay main contacts. I. Switch Input Details: All switch inputs shall have the following options: 1. Input Flexibility: Each switch input shall accept a 2 or 3 wire maintained or momentary switch. It shall be capable of accepting a dry contact, open collector closure, or a 12-24VDC signal. Each switch shall be able to have 2 switch types associated with it in an NB form. 2. Input to Output Programmability: Any switch input shall be programmed to control any or all of the controllers relay outputs without limitations in the network. 3. Input Logic Conditionals: All switch inputs shall have 2 conditionals that add a logic"AND" or"OR"dependent on a relay on, a relay off, an "on" input opened or closed, and an "off' input opened or closed. It shall also have a priority level setting. 4. Input Active Times: All switch inputs shall have a time-of-day or open/close time of action. _ This shall change the switch type on the time-of day for every 30 minutes or change per open/closed times. 5. Input Types: a. Momentary ON/OFF: When momentary contact is made between the ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input shall be turned ON. When momentary contact is made between OFF and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input shall be turned OFF. b. Momentary ON/OFF w/Blink: When momentary contact is made between the ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input shall be turned ON. When momentary contact is made between OFF and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input shall blink and postpone being turned OFF. The alert time shall be programmable from 2 to 99 minutes. The blink alert function shall blink each relay twice prior to turning OFF. If an ON command is received during the blink alert time, relay output shall be overridden and left ON for the override time. Override times shall be adjustable from 5 to 999 minutes in 1-minute increments. ��— c. Momentary Push-Button ON/OFF: When momentary contact is made between the ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input are turned ON and OFF alternately, based on current state, each time contact is made. d. Momentary Push-Button ON: When momentary contact is made between the ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input shall be turned ON. e. Momentary Push-Button OFF: When momentary contact is made between ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input shall be turned OFF. f. Momentary Push-Button Toggle: When momentary contact is made between ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input shall toggle from the present state. g. Maintained ON/OFF: When contact is made between the ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input are turned ON. When contact is broken between ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input are turned OFF. h. Maintained Multi-way: When contact is either made or broken between the ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input will be toggled between ON and OFF '- conditions. This function shall be similar to that of standard 3 and 4 way switches. i. Maintained ON/OFF w/Blink: When contact is made between the ON and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input are turned ON. When contact is broken between ON _ and COM, relay outputs controlled by this input shall blink and postpone being turned OFF. The alert time shall be programmable from 2 to 99 minutes. The blink alert function shall blink each relay twice prior to turning OFF. If an ON command is received during the blink alert time, relay output shall be overridden and left ON for the override time. Override times shall be adjustable from 5 to 999 minutes in 1- minute increments. j. Timed ON: The timed ON input shall operate either from the input closure or open. If programmed to operate from the closure, the relays turn ON when the input closes and turn OFF after the timed duration. The relays do nothing when the input opens. If programmed to operate from the open, the relays turn ON when the input closes and remain ON. When the input opens, the relays turn OFF after the timed ON duration. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 6 of 15 -- City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation k. HID Bi-Level: This feature requires the configuration of ON/OFF relay outputs and HI/LOW relay outputs. The first momentary contact between ON and COM sets the ON relay outputs to ON and the HI/LOW outputs to HI (for at least 15 Minutes). The second contact switches the HI/LOW outputs to LOW. Additional contact closures will toggle the HI/LOW relay outputs. The cycle then repeats until momentary contact is made between switch input OFF and COM. Then the ON/OFF outputs and HI/LOW outputs are turned OFF. I. Two-Step Alternating Sequence: The first time the switch is activated, relay outputs programmed as "Group A" are turned ON and relay outputs programmed as "Group B" are turned OFF. The second time the switch is activated, "Group A" relay outputs are turned OFF and "Group B" relay outputs are turned ON. The third time the switch is activated, the pattern begins again at step one. m. Four-Step Alternating Sequence: The first time the switch is activated, relay outputs programmed as "Group A" are turned ON and relay outputs programmed as "Group B" are turned OFF. The second time the switch is activated, "Group A" relay outputs are turned OFF and "Group B" relay outputs are turned ON. The third time the switch is activated; both "Group A"and "Group B" relay outputs are turned ON. The fourth time the switch is activated; both "Group A" and "Group B" relays are turned OFF. The fifth time the switch is activated, the process begins again at step one. n. Set Preset: When momentary contact is made between the ON and COM, the selected preset scene will be activated. o. Force Timer: When momentary contact is made between the ON and COM, the selected timer will be activated. J. Timer Functions: Each of the programmable lighting controllers shall have the described timer options listed below for the relay outputs. 1. Time of Day Timers: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a minimum of 128 available timers (scheduled events)for use in developing time-of-day automated schedules. Each timer shall have the ability to turn any or all relay outputs ON or OFF at any time in 1-minute increments. Timers shall be day-of-week selectable and may be programmed to activate on any combination of days of the week. Each shall be capable of being programmed to be enabled or disabled for any day of the calendar year. tW 2. Astronomical Scheduling: Each controller shall contain an astronomical time clock that shall calculate sunrise and sunset times based on the geographical latitude and longitude positioning. Sunrise and sunset times may be used as activation times for any system timer. In addition to sunrise and sunset time activation, the control shall be capable of programming activation time before and after these times based on an offset of 1-999 minutes. 3. Open/Closed Time Control: The user shall also have the option of controlling relay outputs in relation to the Open/Closed times of the facility. The Open/Closed times may vary for different days of the week and may be programmed for each day of the year. In addition to Open/Closed time activation, the control shall be capable of programming activation time before and after these Open/Closed times based on an offset of 1-999. 4. OFF Hour Sweeps: The system shall also support after hours OFF sweeps of selected relay or groups of relays at user defined one, two, or three hour intervals. K. Relay Output OFF Options: Each relay shall have the option to control the relay OFF in a certain way other than the default OFF. 1. Single Blink Alert: Each relay output within the programmable lighting controller shall be individually programmable to blink and postponed prior to being turned OFF. The alert -' time shall be programmable from 2 to 99 minutes. The blink alert function shall blink each relay twice prior to turning OFF with a timer OFF sweep to warn occupants of the upcoming OFF event. If an ON command is received during the blink alert time, the relay output shall be overridden and left ON for the override time. Override times shall be adjustable from 5 to 999 minutes in 1-minute increments. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943- Page 7 of 15 City of Waterloo-Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 2. Double Blink Alert: Each relay output within the programmable lighting controller shall be individually programmable to blink and postponed prior to being turned OFF and then blinked 1 minute before turning OFF. The alert time shall be programmable from 2 to 99 minutes. The blink alert function shall blink each relay twice for each alert to warn occupants of the upcoming OFF event. If an ON command is received during the blink alert time, the relay output shall be overridden and left ON for the override time. Override times shall be adjustable from 5 to 999 minutes in 1-minute increments. 3. HID Delay: Each relay output within the programmable lighting controller shall have the ability to be controlled like a Single Blink Alert as described above but without the blink alert to prevent damage to HID lamps. 4. Alarm ON: Relays shall be capable of performing a momentary ON function. The ON function shall be programmable from 1 to 99 seconds. 5. Alarm OFF: Relays shall be capable of performing a momentary OFF function. The OFF function shall be programmable from 1 to 99 seconds. 6. Alarm Pulsed ON: Relays shall be capable of being cycled ON and OFF at 1 second intervals and returning to the OFF state. It shall be programmable from 1 to 90 seconds. 7. Alarm Pulsed OFF: Relays shall be capable of being cycled OFF and ON at 1 second intervals and returning to the ON state. It shall be programmable from 1 to 90 seconds. 8. Automatic Control Switch-OFF: Relays shall be capable of being cycled OFF for 5 seconds and then returned to the ON state for controlling Sentry or AS110 switches. 9. Automatic Control Switch-Blink: Relays shall be capable of being cycled OFF for 1.5 seconds and then returned to the ON state for controlling Delay-OFF mode on AS110 switches. L. Presets: The lighting controller shall support up to 256 user-defined presets of ON/OFF relay patterns. The presets shall be invoked by switch or timer actuation. <,_ M. Descriptive Names: The system shall support the optional assignment of descriptive names (up to 10 characters)to the lighting controller, relay outputs, relay groups, inputs, timers, and presets. These names shall be able to switch from custom names to default names. N. Password Protection: Each Programmable controller shall have user definable 6 digit alphanumeric passwords with 2 levels of access. It shall have control and edit for level 1 and (> control only access for level 2. O. Networking: 1. Network Capacities: In addition to the data line devices mentioned in Section D, rr, LightLEEDer Controllers shall be linked together on the data line to form a Local Area Network (LAN) of up to 254 controller nodes. 2. Network Features: The basic network manager shall allow connection of up to 254 controllers and 254 data line devices (on top of the 64 devices per panel) and provide USB communications. The advanced network manager shall have a high speed LightSync scanner, 4 gateway device ports, power for LightSync devices, and TCP/IP along with the items in the basic network manager. 3. Network Universe: The network of panels shall be capable to connect to other networks over a network (LAN) or over the internet (WAN) to interconnect multiple systems. 4. Network Gateway: The following special purpose gateways shall be available and provides network wide control from a single point for its specialized function: a. DTMF Telephone Control: The telephone gateway shall support the control of relays, presets and groups on the network via voice prompted commands and DTMF signals from a touch-tone telephone. b. DMX Control: The DMX gateway shall support the control of relays on the network from a single point connection using standard USITT DMX512 protocol used by _ theatrical lighting systems. c. Modbus Control: The Modbus gateway shall support communications from the BAS system using Modicon Modbus protocol from a single point connection. All network input status, relay status and control shall be supported. d. N2 Control: The N2 gateway shall support communications from the BAS system using Metasys-N2 protocol from a single point connection. Network wide group status and control shall be supported. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943- Page 8 of 15 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation e. BACnet Control: The BACnet gateway shall support communications from the BAS system using BACnet MSTP or BACnet IP protocol from a single point connection. It shall allow up to 500 single relay, 100 multiple relays, 48 groups, and 48 presets. f. LonWorks Control: The LonWorks gateway shall support communications from the BAS systems using LonWorks protocol from a single point connection. It shall allow up to 200 single relay, 100 multiple relays, 48 groups, and 48 presets. 5. BAS System /Lighting Control System: Programmable lighting controllers integrated/interfaced to other building control and alarm systems must remain completely functional and continue to process all programmed commands, including time schedules and local switching. P. Runtime Logging and Trending: Each lighting control panel shall be capable of logging Runtime and Trending data for each relay. This data shall be able to be harvested and exported from the entire system. 1. Runtime Logging: The controller shall be able to internally log the runtime of each relay for up to 30 days. This data shall be able to be harvested with a personal computer at 1 minute intervals. 2. Logging and Trending Software: Runtime Logging and Trending software shall be available for harvesting data from the lighting control panels. It shall have a dedicated personal computer connected to the system through a LAN or USB cable to the panel or network controller. a. Load Configuration: Each relay in the system shall be able to have a wattage load assigned to it to represent the actual load on the relay. Loads shall be able to be named, or names shall be exported directly from the system programming software. b. Combined Loads: Up to 254 combined relay loads shall be allowed, for total wattage a_ recording of areas in the facility. The combined loads shall allow relays from any panel in the network. Combined loads shall be able to be named for identification in reports and graphs. i7; c. Daily or Monthly Usage Report: The software shall be capable of generating spreadsheet reports in a daily or monthly format for each relay or combined relays in 1 the system. d. Export Data: The compiled reports shall be able to be exported to a .csv (comma 6 01- separated value)file. These files when exported shall be coded for the year, month, o and date. e. Daily or Monthly Usage Graphs: The software shall be capable of generating usage graphs in a daily or monthly format for each relay or combined relays in the system. f. Printing: Daily or monthly usage graphs shall have the capability to be directly printed from the software. g. Live Usage Graphs: The software shall have 1 to 9 live usage meter dials to display the present wattage of combined loads. ct Q. R. LL 2.04 LIGHTING CONTROL RELAYS: c A. Reliant40-1 Single Pole Relay 1. Listing: Lighting control relays shall be individually UL and CUL listed and shall bear labels indicating compliance. 2. Labeling: Lighting control relays shall bear labels for relay current and SCCR ratings. 3. Endurance: Lighting control relays shall be designed and tested to have a minimum cycle life of 200,000 ON/OFF cycles @ FULL LOAD and 2,000,000 ON/OFF cycles at no load. 4. SCCR: Lighting relays shall have a SCCR rating of 18,000 amps up to 347 VAC. 5. Loads: Lighting control relays shall be designed for control of 120, 277 or 347 VAC lighting control circuits at a full 40 AMPS for Tungsten or Ballast loads, 16 AMPS for Electronic Ballasts (UL limit), and motor loads of 1.5 Hp @ 120 VAC. 6. Latching: Lighting control relays shall be designed with a latching mechanism that shall hold the relay in its last activated state indefinitely, with no change of state during an interruption of power. Solid state or electrically held relays are not acceptable. 7. Auxiliary Contacts: Each Lighting control relay shall contain an auxiliary set of contacts rated at 1 AMP 30 VACNDC electrically isolated but mechanically linked to the main contacts for the purpose of true status monitoring and pilot light activation. 8. Mounting: Relays shall be capable of panel mounting. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 9 of 15 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 9. Lock-Out: Relays shall be equipped with an Enable/Disable switch to lock out On/Off control from the controller. 10. Actuator: Relays shall be equipped with a manual actuator switch for turning the relay ON or OFF along with status indication. B. Reliant40-2 and 3 Pole Relay: 1. Multi-pole: Electrical contractor shall provide quantities of 40 AMP 2 or 3 pole relays as indicated on the drawings and schedules as specified herein. 2. Labeling: 40 AMP 2 or 3 pole relays shall be individually UL and CUL listed and shall bear labels indicating compliance. 3. Voltages: 40 AMP 2 or 3 pole contactors shall be designed for the control of 208, 240 and 480 VAC lighting loads at a full 40 Amps. -- 4. Mechanical Link: Poles within the contactor shall be electrically isolated but mechanically linked so as to open and close together without the possibility of one pole being closed while the other remains open. Systems that utilize two single-pole relays to accomplish this function are not acceptable. 2.05 SWITCH STATIONS AND COVER PLATES A. Hardwired Switches and Cover Plates: Electrical contractor shall provide and install switch plates and switches of the quantities and types shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1. NFP Momentary Switch a. Switch: It shall consist of a single-pole double-throw center OFF momentary switch rated at 6 Amps @ 125 VAC. They shall be available in black, white, gray, or red $i colors b. Cover Plates: Plates shall be available in stainless steel, brushed aluminum, or painted cold rolled steel. They shall be available with 1-3 switches per single gang plate and 4-8 in a 2 gang plate. c. Status: LED status indicators shall be optional for each switch provided. Z13 d. Nomenclature: Engraving shall be available on phenolic labels or directly on the plate. 2. Heavy Duty Switch a. Switch: It shall consist of a single-pole double-throw center OFF momentary heavy duty toggle or Decora®paddle switch rated at 15-20 Amps @ 120/277 VAC. They shall be available in ivory or white colors. b. Cover Plates: Plates shall be available for Decora®switches in ivory, white, or stainless steel with or without visible screws and come in 1-4 gangs. c. Nomenclature: Engraving shall be available on phenolic labels or directly on the plate. 3. Key Switch a. Key Switch: Key switch shall consist of a single-pole double-throw momentary or maintained switch. They shall be available to allow the key to be removed in the ON =� position or the OFF position. b. Cover plates: Plates shall be available in stainless steel, brushed aluminum, or z painted cold rolled steel. They shall be available with 1-2 switches per gang plate and up to 4 gangs. c. Status: LED status indicators shall be optional for each switch provided. d. Nomenclature: Engraving shall be available on phenolic labels or directly on the plate. 4. Touch Activated Switch a. Switch: Touch activated switch shall be a momentary output solid-state piezo type push button. b. Cover plates: Plates shall be available in stainless steel, brushed aluminum, or painted cold rolled steel. They shall be available with 1-3 switches per gang plate and up to 4 gangs. c. Gasket: Cover plate neoprene gaskets shall be available for weatherproof applications. d. Status: LED status indicators rings shall be optional for each switch provided. e. Nomenclature: Engraving shall be available on phenolic labels or directly on the plate. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 10 of 15 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation B. Custom Switch Plates and Graphic Switch Stations: Electrical contractor shall provide and install custom switch plates and graphical switching stations of the quantities and types shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1. Switch Plates: Switch plates shall consist of a control panel faceplate, switches and other control devices as required, LED pilot lights and all mounting hardware. - 2. Material: Switch plates shall be manufactured from a single piece of stainless steel, aluminum, brass or bronze, finished and labeled as per the plans and specifications or as indicated on approved drawings. _ 3. Mounting: Switch plates shall be designed to mount either to a standard electrical gang box supplied by the electrical contractor for either flush or surface mounting or to a custom back-box supplied by the manufacturer. 4. Nomenclature: Switch plate graphics and labeling shall be accomplished through the use of one or a combination of multi-color anodized, engraving or phenolic labels; laser etched, or painted graphics. 5. Graphics: Each switch station shall contain a graphic representation of the controlled space with switches and other control devices graphically located on the station so as to indicate their associated areas of control. C. Dimming: Room controllers shall be provided with 4 independent 0-10V dimming ballast control outputs that shall sink a maximum of 100mA per output. 2.06 CONTROL STATIONS A. Provide control stations with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated. — cc B. Wired Control Stations: a_ a_ 1. General Requirements: a. Power: Class 2 (low voltage). b. UL listed. c. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware. c? d. Borders, logos, and graduations to use laser engraving or silk-screened graphic process that chemically bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by scratching and cleaning. e. Finish: As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under DIGITAL NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS article above. z 2. Multi-Scene Wired Control: a. General Requirements: 1) Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system. 2) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. 3) Replacement of units does not require reprogramming. ec c 4) Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. 0 5) Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings. 6) Software Configuration: (a) Customizable control station device button functionality: (1) Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action. (2) Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on press and defined action on release. (3) Buttons can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such as time of day or partition status. (4) Buttons can be programmed to perform automatic sequence of defined actions. (5) Capable of deactivating select keypads to prevent accidental changes to light levels. (6) Buttons can be programmed for raise/lower of defined loads. (7) Buttons can be programmed to toggle defined set of loads on/off. 7) Status LEDs: (a) Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 11 of 15 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation (b) LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the — button press was properly processed or LEDs to turn off if the button press was not processed. (c) Support logic that defines when LED is illuminated: _ (1) Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels). (2) Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on). (3) Pathway logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on). (4) Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes). b. Wired Keypads ; Lutron seeTouch QS Wallstations: 1) Style: Architectural Non-Insert Style. 2) Mounting: Wallbox or low-voltage mounting bracket; provide wall plates with _ concealed mounting hardware. 3) Button/Engraving Backlighting: (a) Utilize backlighting for buttons and associated engraving to provide readability under all light conditions. (b) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software. 4) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration, and engraving using field-changeable replacement kits. _. 5) Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both momentary and maintained contact closures. 6) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against reversals and shorts. 7) Provide integral infrared receiver for personal control where indicated. c. Wired Keypads ; Lutron Architrave QS Keypads: 1) Mounting: Wallbox ; Lutron Architrave Wallbox; provide wall plates with concealed mounting hardware. 2) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration, and engraving using field-changeable replacement kits. 3) Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both momentary and maintained contact closures. 4) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against reversals and shorts. d. Wired Keypads ; Lutron Signature Series QS Keypads: 1) Mounting: Wallbox ; Lutron Signature Series Wallbox; provide wall plates with ' concealed mounting hardware. 2) Button/Engraving Backlighting: (a) Utilize backlighting for buttons and associated engraving to provide _ readability under all light conditions. (b) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software. 3) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration, and engraving using field-changeable replacement kits. 4) Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both momentary and maintained contact closures. _ 5) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against reversals and shorts. e. Wired Keypads ; Lutron QS Wired Palladiom Wallstations: 1) Style: Architectural Style. —' 2) Mounting: Wallbox; provide wall plates with concealed mounting hardware. 3) Buttons and Faceplate: (a) Buttons to be greater than 0.65 inch in height to provide large target area for ease of use and actuation. (b) Front of buttons to be flush with faceplate. (c) Buttons and faceplate to be of the same material and finish (e.g. plastic/plastic, glass/glass, metal/metal). Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 12 of 15 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation (d) Buttons to depress and provide tactile feedback of a successful button push. Controls utilizing capacitive or resistive touch technology are not acceptable. (e) Gaps to be less than 0.007 inch between buttons and less than 0.15 inch between buttons and faceplate. 4) Button/Engraving Backlighting: (a) Backlighting to be visible through engraved text to provide clear readability in a variety of lighting conditions. (b) Indicate active scene through the intensity of the backlighting (brighter backlit text indicates the active state). (c) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software; capable of dynamic adjustment during usage based on conditional logic (time of day, button press, etc.). (d) Backlight intensity automatically adjusts based on room ambient light level. 5) Keypads to allow field-customization of button color and engraving using field- changeable replacement kits. 6) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against reversals and shorts. 3. Single-Scene or Zoned Wired Control: a. Product: Lutron Pico Wired Control. b. Turn an individual fixture or group of fixtures on and off. c. Raise and lower light levels. d. Recall favorite light levels. 4. Four-Button Preset Wallstation: a° a. Product: Lutron EcoSystem CC-4BRL Four-Button Control. b. Recall four scenes plus all on or all off for one group of fixtures. c. Master raise/lower control for entire group of fixtures. d. Integral IR receiver for personal control. e. Immediate local LED response upon button activation to indicate that a system command has been requested. 5. Wired Keyswitch: a. Product: Lutron QS Keyswitch. b. Configuration: c. Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system. d. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. 0 e. Functionality: 1) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. 2) Requires key insertion to activate actions. S f. Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings. g. Software Configuration: 1) Customizable control station device button functionality: (a) Key positions can be programmed to perform single defined action. _ (b) Key positions can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such as time of day or partition status. 6. Single Touch Slider Control: a. Product: Lutron GrafikT QS Slider. b. Allows control of any single lighting zone in the system. c. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. d. Switch Control: Single touch LED bar for on/off operation. e. Dimmer Control: Single touch LED bar with one portion of bar for on/off operation and one portion for dimmer adjustment. 1) Single touch of light level adjustment control portion of LED bar raises/lowers lights, with new level becoming the current preset level. 2) When off, single touch of on/off control portion of LED bar raises lights to preset level. 3) Provides audible feedback for touch control confirmation. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 13 of 15 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 4) LED bar indicates on/off status and current light level, and functions as locator light when dimmer is off. 5) Provides for customized adjustment of dimmer functions via programming software: _ (a) High/low end trims. (b) LED brightness. (c) Sound on/off. (d) Off fade time. — (e) On fade time. (f) Preset lock capability. f. Slider zones can be chained in partitioned spaces. — 7. Analog Slider Control: a. Product: Lutron QS Slider Control. b. Allows control of any lighting zone in the system via intuitive analog slider control. c. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. d. Available in 1 to 16 zone configurations. e. Available with or without a take command switch to activate the slider scene. f. Optional keypad ganging. — g. Slider zones can be chained in partitioned spaces. h. Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings. i. Functionality: 1) Full range dimming of individual zones or groups of zones. 2) Zone levels indicated by slider position. 3) Integrates with multi-scene wired control. C. Wireless (Radio Frequency) Controls: 1. Product(s): • 2. Communicates via radio frequency to compatible dimmers, switches, and plug-in modules. 3. Does not require external power packs, power or communication wiring. 4. Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. 5. Button Programming: a. Single action. b. Toggle action. c. Defined action on press and defined action on release. 6. Includes LED to indicate button press or programming mode status. 7. Mounting: a. Capable of being mounted with a table stand or directly to a wall under a faceplate. b. Faceplates: Provide concealed mounting hardware. 8. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life. 9. Finish: As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS article above. D. Infrared Handheld Controls:1. Product(s): a. Four-Scene Wireless Infrared Transmitter ; Lutron Model GRX-IT-WH: Operates up to 50 feet line-of-sight to receiver. — b. Single-Scene Wireless Infrared Transmitter ; Lutron Model C-FLRC-WH: Operates up to 12 feet line-of-sight to receiver. 2. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and lighting control; compatibility dependent on that receiver, not transmitter. 4. Learnable by other variable frequency remote controls. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the indicated requirements. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 14 of 15 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 <http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NECA NEIS 1> and, where applicable, NECA 130 <http://www.necanet.org/store/products/index.cfm/NECA 130-10> , except for mounting heights specified in those standards. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Define each dimmer/relay load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions. D. Installation: Where shown on the drawings, the contractor shall furnish and install programmable lighting controllers of the quantities, sizes and types shown on the drawings or specified herein. E. Requirements: All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer requirements and in compliance with all applicable local and national codes and requirements. F. Identify system components in accordance with Section 26 0553. 3.03 MANUFACTURES SERVICES A. Factory Programming: All controllers shall be factory programmed upon request in accordance with the project specifications prior to shipment. B. Installation Assistance: During the installation process, the manufacturer shall provide, at no — cost, technical support via a toll-free telephone line to the installing contractor or owner's representative to answer questions and supply additional information when required. C. System Start-Up: The system manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized field technician to :n the project site after installation has been completed and prior to system being energized for the purpose of testing and adjustment of the system. Factory field technician shall test and verify all system functions and ensure proper operation of the system components in accordance with the specifications and on-site conditions. The installing contractor shall notify the system manufacturer in writing that the system is completely wired and ready to be energized and tested 4 weeks prior to scheduling a field technician for start-up of the system. Should the field technician arrive on the job site and find the installation incomplete, the installing contractor shall pay the cost of any future visits by the field technician required to complete the system start-up. D. On-Site Programming: During the start-up procedure, the factory field technician shall provide programming assistance and guidance to the building operating personnel in order to program the systems for initial operation. E. Instruction: During the start-up procedure, the factory field technician shall provide training to the building operating personnel in the operation, programming and maintenance of the lighting control system. F. As-Built Drawings: After completion of the system installation and testing, the manufacturer shall provide 3 sets of"as-built" drawings. G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: After completion of the system installation and testing, the manufacturer shall provide 3 sets of Operations and Maintenance Manuals. H. Lifetime Toll-Free Telephone Support: The system manufacturer shall provide a toll-free telephone number to the system user and shall allow access to free telephone support for the life of the system. END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 0943 - Page 15 of 15 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 2200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General purpose transformers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Flexible conduit connections. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 10 CFR 431, Subpart K- Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment- Distribution Transformers Current Edition. B. IEEE C57.94 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and Maintenance of Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers 2015. C. IEEE C57.96 - IEEE Standard Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers 2013. a_ D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. E. NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers 2015. F. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications 2014. G. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)2020. 0 H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having , Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. c a; I. UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers Current Edition, Including All Revisions. — J. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class and rated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed 0 features. z 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Temperature: Do not exceed the following maximum temperatures during and after installation of transformers. 1. Greater than 10 kVA: 104 degrees F maximum. 2. Less than 10 kVA: 77 degrees F maximum. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2200 - Page 1 of 4 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. _ B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle. D. Source Limitations: Furnish transformers produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 TRANSFORMERS -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according to -- IEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Greater than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 104 degrees F. b. Less than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 77 degrees F. C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, even at 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movement and maintain consistent pressure throughout core length. D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectively seal out moisture and other contaminants. E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV. F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap. G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload capacity based on rated winding temperature rise. 2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS _ A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings. B. Primary Voltage: 480 volts delta, 3 phase. C. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. D. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C average winding temperature rise. 2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise. E. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded. F. Winding Taps: 1. Less than 3 kVA: None. 2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. 3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. 4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5 _ percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. G. Energy Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K. H. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20 I. Mounting Provisions: Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2200 - Page 2 of 4 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. 2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting. J. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 2. 2. Construction: Steel. a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated. b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. K. Accessories: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets. 2. Weathershield Kits: Provide for ventilated transformers installed outdoors to provide a listed NEMA 250, type 3R assembly. 3. Lug Kits: Sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that suitable support frames and anchors are installed where required and that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transformers. C. Perform pre-installation tests and inspections on transformers per manufacturer's instructions and as specified in NECA 409. Correct deficiencies prior to installation. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94. ` D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 0533.13, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure. E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. F. Install transformers plumb and level. G. Transformer Support: 1. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529, where not furnished by transformer manufacturer. 2. Use integral transformer flanges, accessory brackets furnished by manufacturer, or field- fabricated supports to support wall-mounted transformers. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000. 4. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut)to support suspended transformers. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. I. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise transmission. J. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated. K. Where furnished as a separate accessory, install transformer weathershield per manufacturer's instructions. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2200 - Page 3 of 4 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3.03 ADJUSTING — A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION 3 _ U� o tl. z F C.3 CC C/} Cr Q iL L 1 ` I Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2200 - Page 4 of 4 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES — A. Lighting and appliance panelboards. B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS = A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service 2013e (Amended 2017). B. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards 2015. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum)2020. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards 2011. — cr F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less 2013. G. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems , 2017. H. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having S Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. u J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 0 K. UL 67 - Panelboards Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 5 M. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters Current Edition, Including All Revisions. cc N. UL 1699-Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Z A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2416 - Page 1 of 4 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon request. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry -- locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. 2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com. D. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 PANELBOARDS -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. —' B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. 2. Listed series ratings are not acceptable. D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2416 - Page 2 of 4 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. 3. Fronts: 4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. J. Load centers are not acceptable. 2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: — 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity: r; — a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Copper suitable for terminating copper conductors only. 4. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 5. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated: a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI)Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel. b. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter(AFC') Circuit Breakers: Combination type listed as complying with UL 1699. r 6. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. 7. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1. D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2416 - Page 3 of 4 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529. F. Install panelboards plumb. G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. I. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.J. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section _ 7.6.1.1for all main circuit breakers. Tests listed as optional are not required. D. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. E. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. F. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 0 a B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts. y C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between s�' each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit , directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's c instructions. C B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. U" END OF SECTION r� C fir.. 7 r Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2416 - Page 4 of 4 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Wall plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Devices for automatic control of lighting, including occupancy sensors, in-wall time switches, and in-wall interval timers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2010. C. NEMA WD 1 -General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015). D. NEMA WD 6 -Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications 2016. E. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 6 F. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches Current Edition, Including All Revisions. a_ G. UL 498 -Attachment Plugs and Receptacles Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS , A. Coordination: 2 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to z provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. g 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction cc prior to proceeding with work. o B. Sequencing: ca 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2726 - Page 1 of 4 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks. E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens. F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. G. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES IMP A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated. B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with stainless steel wall plate. C. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate. 2.03 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: _ 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 2. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20and where applicable FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. `Y 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 0. 2. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498and where applicable FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. LL C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. "" D. GFCI Receptacles: 1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and 2 light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A. a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device. 2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style. 3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 4. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 2.05 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com/#sle. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2726 - Page 2 of 4 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation MEM 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. 4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic. D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel. E. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed. F. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. F. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION f:_ A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor to top of box. b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor to top of box. c. Fan Speed Controllers: 48 inches above finished floor to top of box. d. Receptacles: 20 inches above finished floor to top of box or 6 inches above counter. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles or wall switches are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. 4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2726 - Page 3 of 4 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.H. Unless otherwise indicated, GFCI receptacles may be connected to provide feed-through protection to downstream devices. Label such devices to indicate they are protected by upstream GFCI protection. — I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. J. Install wall switches with OFF position down. K. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. L. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on bottom and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. —' END OF SECTION Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2726 - Page 4 of 4 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 2813 FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. B. Section 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 2012. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses- Part 12: Class R Fuses Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated fuses. cr, 2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain o direction before proceeding with work. >. 1.05 SUBMITTALS 5 A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves. 0 C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. i 2. Extra Fuses: One set(s) of three for each type and size installed. 3. Fuse Pullers: One set(s) compatible with each type and size installed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle. B. Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com/#sle. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5 time-delay. 2.03 FUSES A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2813 - Page 1 of 2 "— City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system. C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch. D. Comply with UL 248-1. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated. F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12. H. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for equipment. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized. B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. END OF SECTION f=1 u, v� Z 0 lHH-' L. 0 0cr c F-• pf L 0 Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2813 - Page 2 of 2 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 2816.13 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed circuit breakers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service 2013e (Amended 2017). B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)2020. C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS z A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, o short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and ' installed features and accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE a A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING z A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed circuit breaker internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com. 2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in enclosures. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2816.13 - Page 1 of 2 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.D. Short Circuit Current Rating: E. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. F. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. G. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: H. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. 2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Interrupting Capacity: 1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 2. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. C. Conductor Terminations: 1. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. D. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. END OF SECTION =t` tam J Z f) z F._ Z Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2816.13 - Page 2 of 2 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 2816.16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed safety switches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 2813 - Fuses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)2020. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. co F. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: g 1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. o 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. o 3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain co direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2816.16 - Page 1 of 3 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed switch internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle. B. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com. E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F. D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load. E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. F. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. G. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.H. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches: As required to accept fuses indicated. 1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent installation of fuses other than Class R. I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. J. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. — K. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unless otherwise indicated. L. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2816.16 - Page 2 of 3 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529. E. Install enclosed switches plumb. F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated or as required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's 1161 instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION cr Q z 0 C) fJ? z 0 r_t L 0 Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 2816.16 - Page 3 of 3 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES -- A. Exterior luminaires. B. Ballasts. C. Poles and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and installation requirements for concrete bases for poles. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. _ D. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices. E. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices: Receptacles for installation in poles. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO LTS - Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signal 2013 (Revised 2019). B. ANSI C78.379 -American National Standard for Electric Lamps -- Reflector Lamps-- 0 Classification of Beam Patterns; 2006. CI CI a_ C. ANSI C82.1 -American National Standard for Lamp Ballast- Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast; 2004. 0 D. ANSI C82.4 -American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - Ballasts for High-Intensity- Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps 2017. E. ANSI C82.11 -American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts- High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts 2017. F. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code 2017. 2 G. IES LM-79 -Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products 2008. H. IES LM-80 -Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages, Arrays, and Modules 2015, with Errata (2017). I. IES RP-8 - Recommended Practice for Design and Maintenance of Roadway and Parking Facility Lighting 2018. C J. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. K. NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems 2006. L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. M. UL 1598- Luminaires Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 8750- Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks, trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate elevation to obtain specified foundation height. 2. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Coordination: Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 5600 - Page 1 of 5 "' City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. 2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with _ all proposed features. 1. LED Luminaires: a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on — replacement parts. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. _ C. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. B. Any deviation from what is called out in the Light Fixture Schedule requires prior approval from the Engineer. 1. Provide Cut Sheets and Photometrics. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, — connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G. LED Luminaires: 1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. — 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 5600 - Page 2 of 5 — City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. — 2.03 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS A. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. B. Dimmable LED Drivers: 1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker. 2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed. — 2.04 POLES A. All Poles: 1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s)and — associated supports and accessories to be installed. 2. Structural Design Criteria: a. Wind Load: Include effective projected area (EPA)of luminaire(s) and associated _ supports and accessories to be installed. 1) Design Wind Speed: 90 miles per hour, with gust factor of 1.3. b. Dead Load: Include weight of proposed luminaire(s)and associated supports and accessories. — 3. Material: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. a, 4. Shape: Round straight, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Finish: Match luminaire finish, unless otherwise indicated. ,r 6. Mounting: Install on concrete foundation, height as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Unless otherwise indicated, provide with the following features/accessories: a. Top cap. — b. Handhole. c. Anchor bolts with leveling nuts or leveling shims. c d. Anchor base cover. e. Provision for pole-mounted weatherproof GFI receptacle. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION — A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. j B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are ry properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. < C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. _ D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501. D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529. E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. F. Pole-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Maintain the following minimum clearances: — a. Comply with IEEE C2. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 5600 - Page 3 of 5 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation b. Comply with utility company requirements. 2. Foundation-Mounted Poles: a. Provide cast-in-place concrete foundations for poles as indicated, in accordance with Section 03 3000. 1) Install anchor bolts plumb per template furnished by pole manufacturer. 2) Position conduits to enter pole shaft. b. Install foundations plumb. c. Install poles plumb, using leveling nuts as required to adjust to plumb. d. Tighten anchor bolt nuts to manufacturer's recommended torque. 3. Grounding: a. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, metal poles, and foundation reinforcement to ._ branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 4. Install separate service conductors, 12 AWG copper, from each luminaire down to handhole for connection to branch circuit conductors. 5. Install weather resistant GFI duplex receptacle with weatherproof cover as specified in Section 26 2726 in designated poles. G. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. H. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. I. Provide concrete bases for lighting poles at locations indicated, in accordance with Section 03 3000. J. Install lamps in each luminaire. Ram K. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect each product for damage and defects. «� C. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000. D. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. 0 E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or "' replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. F. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. B. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution indicated on Drawings. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. B. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 3.07 PROTECTION ' A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations. Project No. 21-25083 Section 26 5600 - Page 4 of 5 City of Waterloo- Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation SECTION 27 1000 STRUCTURED CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Communications system design requirements. B. Communications pathways. C. Communications outlets. D. Communications grounding and bonding. E. Communications identification. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products. F. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. TIA-568.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards 2009c, with Addendum (2016). C. TIA-606 -Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure 2017c. D. TIA-607 - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)for Customer Premises 2019d. E. UL 444 - Communications Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions. r ` 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS z A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructions within the spaces dedicated for communications equipment. 2. Coordinate arrangement of communications equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: At least 3 years experience manufacturing products of the type specified. _ C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Keep stored products clean and dry. Project No. 21-25083 Section 27 1000 - Page 1 of 3 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for projector system in monument, including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures, enclosures and cabinets, and outlets. 1. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and TIA-607 and are UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified. — 2. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F at relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing. 3. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts, under raised floors, and other air-handling spaces. B. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame located at center hub of star; also referred to as "links". 2.02 PATHWAYS A. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0533.13; provide pull cords in all conduit. B. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building — elements. 2.03 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS A. Provide cables with lead content less than 300 parts per million. B. Copper Horizontal Cable: 1. Description: 100 ohm, balanced twisted pair cable complying with TIA-568.2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 444. 2. Cable Type -Voice and Data: TIA-568.2 Category 6 UTP (unshielded twisted pair); 23 AWG. 3. Cable Capacity: 4-pair. 4. Cable Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMP plenum cable unless otherwise indicated. 5. Product(s): a. CommScope; SYSTIMAX Twisted Pair Cables; GigaSPEED XL Category 6 U/UTP Cable: www.commscope.com/#sle. 2.04 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. Comply with TIA-607. B. Comply with Section 26 0526. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA-606. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements. B. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with TIA-607 and NFPA 70. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Install pathways with the following minimum clearances: 1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and uninterruptible power systems. 2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards. 3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures. 4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes. _ B. Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0533.13: 1. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bend(s) between pull points. 2. Conduit Bends: Inside radius not less than 10 times conduit internal diameter. 3. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 100 feet between pull points. Project No. 21-25083 Section 27 1000 - Page 2 of 3 — City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation 4. Do not use conduit bodies. 5. Minimum Cover- Underground Service Entrance: Comply with NFPA 70 and — Communications Service Provider requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING A. Cabling: 1. Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; for unshielded twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter. 2. Do not over-cinch or crush cables. — 3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension. 4. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not chafe or damage outer jacket. B. Service Loops (Slack or Excess Length): Provide the following minimum extra length of cable, looped neatly: 1. At Distribution Frames: 120 inches. _ C. Copper Cabling: 1. Category 5e and Above: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch from point of termination. 2. For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension. — 3. Use T568B wiring configuration. D. Identification: 1. Use wire and cable markers to identify cables at each end. :, — 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. R, B. Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards. C. Visual Inspection: c, 1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings. `J 2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type. 3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels. D. Final Testing: After all work is complete, including installation of telecommunications outlets, •., and telephone dial tone service is active, test each voice jack for dial tone. END OF SECTION i i c _ o Project No. 21-25083 Section 27 1000 - Page 3 of 3 City of Waterloo - Sullivan Brothers Plaza Renovation